Skip to main content

Full text of "Strength of materials : a manual for students of engineering"

See other formats


LIBRARY 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 


Clas. 


STRENGTH     OF     MATERIALS 


STRENGTH       OF 
MATERIALS 

A. MANUAL     FOR     STUDENTS 
OF    ENGINEERING 


BY  WILLIAM  CHARLES  POPPLEWELL 

M.SC.    (VICT.),    ASSOC.    MEM.    INST.    C.E. 

Lecturer  on  Strength  of  Materials,  Theory  of  Structures,  and  Hydraulics,  at 
the  Manchester  Municipal  School  of  Technology  ;  formerly  Assistant 
to  the  Professor  of  Engineering  in  the  University  of  Edin- 
burgh ;  and  Senior  Assistant  Lecturer  in  Engineering 
at  the  Yorkshire  College 


OFTH& 

cRSlTY 

OF 

l\vb* 


OLIVER    AND     BOYD 

EDINBURGH:    TWEEDDALE    COURT 
LONDON:    10    PATERNOSTER    ROW,    E.G. 

1907 


TKQIBB 


PREFACE 

• 

THE  greater  part  of  the  matter  contained  in  the  following  pages 
is  based  on  the  notes  of  lectures  given  to  the  day  and  evening 
students  at  the  Manchester  Municipal  School  of  Technology 
during  the  last  five  sessions. 

The  book  is  intended  for  the  use  of  those  students  of  engineer- 
ing who  are  desirous  of  obtaining  a  working  knowledge  of  the 
fundamental  principles  involved  in  problems  of  machine  and 
structural  design.  It  should  be  found  useful  to  candidates  for 
the  Third  and  Honours  stages  of  the  Examinations  of  the  Board 
of  Education,  the  examination  for  the  admission  of  Associate 
Members  to  the  Institution  of  Civil  Engineers,  as  well  as  the 
examinations  in  the  Engineering  Schools  of  the  Universities. 

It  will  be  seen  that  special  attention  has  been  paid  to  the 
unequal  distribution  of  stress,  and  to  the  limits  of  elasticity  in 
iron  and  steel.  Many  of  the  examples  quoted  are  taken  from 
experimental  results  obtained  by  the  writer  or  his  students.  It 
is  also  to  be  noted  that  the  majority  of  the  proofs  given  are 
similar  to  those  used  in  most  of  the  text-books. 

The  author  desires  to  acknowledge  his  indebtedness  to  the 
many  writers  of  books  and  scientific  papers  to  which  he  has 
referred  in  collecting  these  notes.  W.  C.  P. 

MANCHESTER,  1907. 


175497 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

INTRODUCTORY      ........       xi 

CHAPTEE  I 

STRESS,   STRAIN,  AND   ELASTICITY 

Stress;  Load;  Intensity  of  Stress;  Strain.  Different  Kinds  of 
Stress  and  Strain  :  Simple  Stresses.  Distribution  of  Stress — 
Uniform  Stress  :  Elasticity— Plasticity ;  Hooke's  Law ;  Young's 
Modulus  for  Direct  Elasticity  ;  Lateral  Contraction  and  Dilata- 
tion 1 


CHAPTEE   II 

DIRECT,   TANGENTIAL,  AND   OBLIQUE   STRESSES 

Stress  on  an  Area  not  at  Right  Angles  to  the  Axis  of  a  Body  under 
Simple  Tension  or  Compression.  Effect  of  two  Direct  Stresses 
at  Eight  Angles  :  The  Nature  of  Shear  Stress ;  Shear  Strain- 
Modulus  of  Eigidity ;  Elasticity  of  Volume  or  Cubic  Elasticity  ; 
Relation  between  E,  G,  K  .  .  .  .  .  .15 

CHAPTEE    III 

STRESSES   IN  BEAMS — BENDING  AND   SHEARING  ACTIONS 

Distribution  of  Direct  Stress  in  a  Beam  Section  :  Moment  of  Eesist- 

ance ;  Moments  of  Inertia    ......        25 

CHAPTEE    IV 

GRAPHICAL  METHOD   FOR  DETERMINING  THE  MOMENT  OF  INERTIA 
Moment  of  Inertia  .......        39 

vii 


PAGE 


viii  CONTENTS 

CHAPTEE    V 

DEFLECTION   OF   BEAMS 
First  Method ;  Second  Method  ......        47 

CHAPTER    VI 

SHEAR   STRESS    IN   LOADED   BEAMS 

Distribution  of  Shear  Stress  in  Loaded  Beams.    Deflection  Due  to 

Shear.    Continuous  Beams  ......        69 

CHAPTEE    YII 

RELATION  BETWEEN  LOAD  AND   STRESS   IN  A  PRISMATIC   BAR 

The  General  Problem.  Particular  Cases.  Instances  of  Unequal 
Stresses  due  to  Eccentric  Loading.  Method  of  Measuring  the 
Strains  ........  78 

CHAPTEE    VIII 

PILLARS,   STRUTS,   OR   COLUMNS 
Strength  of  Pillars,  Struts,  or  Columns  .  .  .  .  .92 

CHAPTEE    IX 

TORSION   AND    SPRINGS 

Elastic  Circular  Shaft ;  Angle  of  Twist  of  a  Shaft ;  Horse-power 
Transmitted.  Torsional  Strength  of  Shafts  in  the  Plastic  State. 
Loads  and  Deformations  of  Springs  :  Helical  Springs  of  Round 
Steel  .........  99 

CHAPTEE    X 

TORSION   COMBINED   WITH   BENDING 
The  Effect  of  Torsion  Combined  with  Bending .  .  .  .110 


CONTENTS  ix 

CHAPTER    XI 

STEENGTH  OF  CYLINDERS 

PAGE 

Thin  Cylinders ;  Thick  Cylinders  .  .  .  .  .115 

CHAPTER    XII 

RIVETED  JOINTS 
Strength  and  Efficiency  of  Riveted  Joints          .  .  .  .125 

CHAPTER    XIII 

STRENGTH   OF  MATERIALS   AS   FOUND   FROM  THE 
RESULTS   OF  TESTS 

Testing;    Testing    Machines;    Appliances    for    Measuring  Elastic 

Deformations  .  .  .  .  .  .  .131 

CHAPTER  XIV 

THE  LIMITS   OF  ELASTICITY 

Limit  of  Proportionality ;  Yield  Point ;  Illustrations  of  the  Three 
Limits ;  Unsymmetrical  Loading ;  Changes  of  Limit  by  Previous 
Loading  ........  138 

CHAPTER    XV 

THE  MATERIALS  USED   IN   CONSTRUCTION 

Iron  and  Steel :  The  Low-Carbon  Steels ;  Medium  Steels ;  High- 
Carbon  or  Hard  Steels;  Steel  Castings;  Cast  Iron; 
Malleable  Cast  Iron.  Copper :  Alloys  of  Copper.  Vitreous 
Materials :  Stone ;  Bricks ;  Cement,  Mortar,  and  Concrete ; 
Portland  Cement  Concrete.  Repeated  and  Reversed  Stresses  : 
Safe  Stresses  Allowable  in  Practice.  The  Microstructure  of 
Metals  ....  149 


x  CONTENTS 

APPENDIX — 

PAQB 

General  Table  of  Strengths  and  Weights  .            .            .            .167 

Elastic  or  Young's  Modulus             .  .            .            .            .168 

Weights  of  Materials            .            .  .            .            .            .169 

ADDITIONAL  EXAMINATION  QUESTIONS  .           .           .           .171 

INDEX  179 


INTRODUCTORY 

ALL  material  used  by  the  engineer,  whether  it  forms  part  of  some 
piece  of  mechanism  or  of  a  fixed  structure,  has  to  withstand  the 
application  of  force.  The  structural  part  must  be  so  proportioned 
by  the  engineer  who  initiates  its  design  as  to  be  able  to  carry  the 
loads  which  come  upon  it  without  injury  to  itself,  and  at  the  same 
time  without  the  employment  of  more  material  than  is  necessary. 
It  is  for  the  carrying  out  of  this  safe  and  economical  design  that 
a  knowledge  of  the  "  Strength  of  Materials  "  is  required. 

The  causes  producing  the  loads  which  come  upon  the  various 
parts  of  a  structure,  and  their  magnitudes  as  depending  on  outside 
effects  and  upon  the  form  of  the  structure  as  a  whole,  will  not  be 
discussed  in  any  detail  in  what  follows.  That  part  of  the  subject 
is  generally  dealt  with  under  the  title  of  "  Theory  of  Structures." 
Here  the  reader  is  more  particularly  concerned  with  a  knowledge 
of  the  relations  between  the  ascertained  loads  and  the  dimensions 
and  forms  as  affecting  the  stresses  in  structural  members. 

The  subject  of  "  Strength  of  Materials  "  naturally  divides  itself 
into  two  parts.  The  former  of  these  deals  with  the  nature  and 
intensity  of  the  forces  which  come  upon  a  part,  as  depending  on 
its  form  and  the  loads  which  it  has  to  carry.  The  second  portion 
of  the  subject  relates  more  especially  to  the  effect  which  these 
forces  have  upon  the  internal  structure  of  the  material  itself. 
One  is  analytical  and  depends  upon  mathematical  proofs,  the  other 
is  descriptive  and  experimental. 

This  order  will  be  observed  in  the  following  chapters,  the 
general  laws  bearing  upon  the  relations  of  stress  and  strain,  which 
apply  equally  to  all  materials,  being  taken  first ;  to  be  followed  by 
a  more  detailed  discussion  of  the  effect  of  stress  upon  particular 
materials. 


STRENGTH    OF    MATERIALS 


CHAPTEE    I 

STRESS,   STRAIN,  AND  ELASTICITY 

Stress. — Stress  is  the  force  exerted  by  a  portion  of  material 
upon  that  part  adjacent  to  it. 

A  stress  may  act  normally  to  a  surface,  when  it  will  be  either 
a  compressive  or  a  tensile  stress.  In  the  former  of  these  the 
tendency  is  for  the  two  portions  of  material  on  opposite  sides  of 
the  section  to  be  pressed  against  one  another ;  in  the  latter  case 
the  tendency  is  towards  a  separation  of  the  parts.  Or,  the  stress 
may  be  tangential  to  the  surface  in  question,  with  a  tendency  to 
cause  the  portion  on  one  side  of  the  section  to  slide  upon  the 
other:  this  is  called  a  shear  stress.  Again,  the  stress  may  be 
partly  normal  and  partly  tangential. 

Load. — This  term  is  applied  to  the  total  force  which  acts  upon 
a  structural  part.  A  body  acted  upon  by  a  load  is  said  to  be  in  a 
state  of  stress.  Thus,  in  the  case  of  a  metal  rod  which  is  with- 
standing a  pair  of  loads  or  forces  pulling  away  from  one  another 
at  the  opposite  ends,  the  whole  of  the  material  between  the  two 
ends  is  said  to  be  in  a  state  of  tensile  stress,  and  it  is  only  the 
mutual  adhesion  between  the  individual  particles  which  prevents 
the  metal  from  being  torn  asunder  at  any  point. 

Intensity  of  Stress. — Stress  is  generally  defined  as  being  so 

many  units  of  force  acting  upon  a  unit  of  the  area  referred  to. 

The  load,  on  the  other  hand,  is  defined  as  so  many  units  of  force, 

irrespective  of  the  extent  of  the  surface  upon  which  it  acts.    Thus 

i  A 


2  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

in  the  case  of  the  above  tension  bar,  the  load  might  be  given  as 
so  many  tons,  and  if  the  extent  of  the  area  of  the  cross-section 
were  so  many  square  inches,  the  stress  would  be  given  as  so  many 
tons  acting  on  each  square  inch,  or  as  so  many  tons  per  square 
inch. 

The  principal  units  employed  for  the  measurement  of  stress 
are  as  follows : — 

In  Great  Britain. — For  the  metals  and  timber  the  stresses  are 
usually  given  in  tons  per  square  inch,  and,  less  frequently,  in 
pounds  per  square  inch. 

For  brickwork,  masonry,  and  concrete,  stresses  are  given  in 
tons  per  square  foot,  and  sometimes  in  pounds  per  square  foot. 

In  the  United  States  of  America  the  units  employed  are 
respectively  pounds  per  square  inch  and  pounds  per  square  foot. 

In  the  countries  using  the  metric  system,  kilogrammes  or 
grammes  per  square  centimetre  or  millimetre  are  the  units. 

Strain. — Strain  is  the  deformation  brought  about  by  stress. 
Stress  never  occurs  without  changing  the  shape  of  the  piece  of 
material  on  which  it  acts. 

For  example,  in  the  case  of  the  steel  bar  before  referred  to,  a 
tension  load  or  pull  is  put  upon  the  bar,  causing  tensile  stress 
throughout  its  length,  with  the  result  that  the  bar  is  stretched : 
this  stretch  is  the  strain. 

The  strain  may  be  temporary  or  permanent,  or  part  of  it  may 
be  temporary  and  part  permanent.  Under  the  ordinary  working 
loads  which  are  put  upon  engineering  materials  the  strains 
accompanying  the  stresses  are  relatively  of  very  small  magni- 
tude, and  are  almost  always  temporary,  disappearing  on  the 
removal  of  the  loads.  When,  however,  the  loading  is  carried 
beyond  the  working  limits  the  strains  become  larger,  and  the 
material  only  partially  recovers  itself  on  the  removal  of  the  load, 
leaving  the  remainder  of  the  deformation  as  permanent  strain. 

Different  Kinds  of  Stress  and  Strain. 

Simple  Stresses. — There  are  three  kinds  of  simple  stress, 
namely :  Tension  or  pulling ;  compression  or  thrusting ;  and 
simple  shear. 

In  Tensile  Stress  the  loads  act  outwards  along  the  axis  of  the 
piece  of  material,  giving  rise  to  a  tensile  stress  on  any  section 


STRESS,  STRAIN,  AND  ELASTICITY  3 

normal  to  the  axis.  The  strain  in  this  case  consists  of  the  amount 
the  bar  is  stretched ;  this  is  shown  by  the  dotted  portion  on  Fig. 
I  (a). 

In  Compressive  Stress  the  line  of  action  of  the  loads  is  the 
same,  but  they  tend  towards  instead  of  away  from  one  another, 


(*) 


\ 


O>- 


(I) 

FIG.  1. 


giving  rise  to  a  stress  which  compels  the  particles  into  closer 
union  and  at  the  same  time  causes  a  shortening,  Fig.  1  (&). 

The  above  are  called  direct  stresses. 

In  Simple  Shear  the   loads  act   parallel   to   one  another   in 


4  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

opposite  directions,  tending  to  cause  the  two  portions  of  the 
material  acted  upon  to  slide  one  upon  the  other. 

The  strain  caused  by  shear  stress  is  one  of  distortion.  This  is 
shown  by  the  dotted  portion,  Fig.  1  (c). 

Torsion  is  the  particular  case  of  shear  stress  which  occurs 
when  a  shaft  is  twisted,  Fig.  1  (d).  The  effect  is  to  cause  any 
two  adjacent  normal  sections  of  the  shaft  to  revolve  relatively  to 
one  another.  The  strain  in  this  case  is  measured  by  the  angle  of 
rotation  of  one  end  of  the  shaft  with  respect  to  the  other. 

Bending  or  Cross-breaking  is  the  kind  of  stress  met  with  where 
the  load  is  applied  in  such  a  way  that  it  causes  a  bar  to  bend,  as 
shown  on  Fig.  1  (/).  Here  the  bending  action  of  the  load  results 
in  a  curving  of  the  beam,  the  material  on  the  convex  surface  being 
lengthened  and  put  in  tension,  while  that  on  the  concave  side  is  in 
compression.  Thus  there  are  two  kinds  of  simple  stress  occurring 
at  the  same  time.  The  strain  in  this  case  is  the  amount  of  deflec- 
tion of  the  centre  from  its  original  position,  measured  in  a  direction 
at  right  angles  to  the  axis. 


Distribution  of  Stress  —  Uniform  Stress. 

It  has  been  said  that  stress  is  expressed  as  the  amount  of  the 
force  (compression,  tension,  or  shear)  acting  upon  each  unit  of  area 
exposed  to  it.  When  the  load  is  caused  to  act  in  such  a  way  that 
the  intensity  of  the  stress  is  the  same  at  all  points  of  the  sectional 
area  considered,  it  is  said  to  be  uniform.  In  such  a  case  the 
stress  is 


where  P  is  the  total  force  or  load  and  A  the  area  of  the  section 
considered.  This  applies  to  simple  tension,  compression,  and 
shear. 

But  it  is  possible  to  apply  the  load  in  such  a  way  that  the 
intensity  of  the  stress  is  not  the  same  at  all  points  of  the  area. 
For  instance,  if  the  pull  in  a  tie  bar  is  applied  along  a  line  which 
lies  outside  the  geometrical  axis  of  the  bar,  the  intensity  of  the 
stress  on  a  section  at  right  angles  to  the  axis  is  not  the  same  at  all 
points.  In  such  a  case  the  above  equation  only  serves  to  give  the 
average  stress. 


STRESS,  STRAIN,  AND  ELASTICITY  5 

Also,  a  stress  may  or  may  not  vary  uniformly.     The  principal 
cases  of  stress  are  summarised  in  the  following  table : — 


Nature  of  Stress. 

Kind  of  Strain. 

How  Strain  is  Measured. 

Tension         \ 
Compression/ 

Change  in  length 

(Change  in  length) 
(Original  length) 

Shear 

Distortion 

(Angle  of  distortion) 
(Unit  angle) 

Torsion 

Twisting 

(Angle  of  twist) 

Bending 

Deflection 

(Amount  of  deflection) 

(Span) 

Elasticity — Plasticity. — It  has  been  said  that  the  strain  in  a 
piece  of  material  under  stress  is  sometimes  temporary  and  some- 
times permanent,  or  partly  temporary  and  partly  permanent.  If, 
after  the  removal  of  the  load,  the  strain  wholly  disappears  by 
reason  of  the  material  recovering  its  original  form  and  dimensions, 
the  strain  is  said  to  have  been  temporary  and  the  state  of  the 
material  to  be  elastic. 

When,  however,  the  material  fails  to  recover  its  original 
dimensions  and  some  of  the  strain  remains  after  the  removal  of 
the  stress,  the  material  is  said  to  have  been  strained  beyond  its 
elastic  limit,  and  to  have  acquired  permanent  set. 

Almost  all  the  materials  of  engineering  exhibit  this  property 
of  taking  permanent  set  after  a  certain  stress  has  been  reached. 
In  some,  permanent  set  is  found  after  the  application  of  very 
small  stresses. 

Materials  like  wrought  iron  and  mild  steel  are  found  to  arrive 
at  a  point  in  the  loading  when  the  strain  goes  on  increasing  with 
little  or  no  increase  in  load.  When  this  point  has  been  reached 
the  material  is  said  to  have  become  plastic. 

In  materials  where  this  plastic  state  is  reached,  the  period 


6  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

extending  from  the  end  of  the  elastic  to  the  beginning  of  the 
plastic  stage  is  spoken  of  as  the  semi-plastic  stage.  The  part  of 
this  subject  which  relates  to  the  stresses  and  strains  in  the  plastic 
and  semi-plastic  stages  will  be  left  for  later  consideration. 

For  the  present,  all  the  material  dealt  with  will  be  assumed  to 
be  perfectly  elastic,  homogeneous  and  isotropic  —  that  is,  to  have 
the  same  properties  at  all  points  and  in  every  direction. 

Hooke's  Law.  —  The  first  law  connecting  stress  and  strain  in 
elastic  bodies  is  that  enunciated  by  Hooke,  and  which  says, 
"Stress  is  proportional  to  Strain."  Thus,  if  a  bar  is  strained 
a  given  amount  under  a  certain  stress,  it  will  be  strained 
double  this  amount  under  twice  the  stress,  three  times  for  thrice 
the  stress,  and  so  on.  The  same  is  true  for  every  kind  of 
strain,  whether  it  be  change  in  length,  distortion,  deflection  or 
twist. 

In  Fig.  2  is  shown  a  prismatic  bar  to  which  is  applied  a  tensile 
load,  P,  acting  along  its  axis.  If  the  area  of  the  cross-section  of 


P   —  -  ' 


FIG.  2. 


the  bar  taken  at  right-angles  to  its  axis  be  called  A,  then  the 
tensile  stress  upon  the  bar  will  be  : 


Previous  to  the  application  of  the  load  two  points  are  marked 
upon  the  surface  of  the  bar,  at  a  distance  apart,  I.  When  the 
load  is  applied  this  distance  is  increased  by  an  amount  x,  so  that 
the  distance  between  the  points  is  now  (l+x)  instead  of  I. 

rv* 

The  strain  is  then  -j-s  and  as,  according  to  Hooke's  Law.  stress 
is  proportional  to  strain, 


Young's   Modulus   for   Direct   Elasticity.  —  The  amount   of 
elastic  strain  in  tension  or  compression  corresponding  to  a  given 


STRESS,  STRAIN,  AND  ELASTICITY  7 

stress  varies  for  different  materials,  and  is  defined  by  what  is 
called  Young's  Modulus,  or  the  Elastic  Modulus  or  Coefficient. 

If  the  bar  is  extended  an  amount  x,  by  the  application  of  a 
stress  /,  then,  according  to  Hooke's  Law,  in  order  to  extend  the 
bar  an  amount  I,  the  stress  must  be  proportionately  greater.  This 
stress  is  the  elastic  modulus  and  is  constant  for  a  given  material. 

It  may  be  defined  otherwise  as  the  stress  which  would  be 
required  to  extend  (or  compress)  a  body  through  a  distance  equal 
to  its  own  original  length,  on  the  assumption  that  the  material 
remained  perfectly  elastic. 

This  constant  for  direct  elasticity  is  usually  denoted  by  the 
symbol  E.  Thus: 

*          / 
I  E 

or,  E-£ 

stress          sL. 

or  again,  E   = —    =     x 

strain  -j- 

Variation  in  length  x 

where          Strain   =    —     .    . — ^- —  =    -r 

Original  length  / 

T*  * 

If   — ,  the  strain,  is  made  equal  to  unity,  the  stress  /  then 

h 

becomes  E,  the  elastic  modulus,  which  from  this  point  of  view  may 
be  defined  as  the  stress  required  to  produce  unit  strain. 

For  example,  if  a  bar  of  steel  1  sq.  in.  in  section  is  found 
to  stretch  ^^th  of  an  incn  ^n  10  ins.' of  its  length  when  a  load 
of  10,000  Ibs.  is  gradually  applied,  the  value  of  the  Young's 
Modulus  will  be 

10,000x10 

=        ~i~ 

300 
=    30,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

This  is  somewhere  near  the  usual  modulus  for  steel  and 
wrought  iron,  which  is  fairly  constant,  and  is  found  to  vary 
somewhere  between  27,000,000  and  31,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 
For  cast  iron  it  is  about  15,000,000,  and  for  copper  16,000,000  Ibs. 
per  sq.  in. 

In   the  above  case  the  bar  will  have  been  stretched  -^V^h 


a 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


of  its  own  length  under  a  stress  of  10,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 
The  working  stress  on  structural  steel  does  not  often  exceed 
15,000  Ibs.  on  the  sq.  in.,  or  one-and-a-half  times  the  above 
stress.  This  means  that  the  strain  will  be  increased  in  the 
same  ratio,  or  the  greatest  stretch  to  be  expected  in  steel  under 
the  working  conditions  will  not  exceed  about  -ornyirth  Part  of 
its  length. 

A  knowledge  of  the  modulus  of  any  given  material  is  im- 
portant in  enabling  calculations  to  be  made  as  to  the  strains 
likely  to  occur  in  structural  parts  when  subjected  to  working 
loads,  and  also  calculations  of  the  probable  strains  in  complex 
structures  built  of  materials  having  widely  differing  moduli. 

What  has  been  said  about  elastic  strain  in  tension  applies 
equally  to  compression. 

The  uses  and  meanings  of  the  terms  which  have  been  denned 
will  be  made  clearer  by  following  the  details  of  the  two  examples 
given  below.  The  figures  given  were  found  in  making  experi- 
ments upon  bars  of  the  materials  mentioned. 

Example  1. — Experiment  on  the  elastic  extension  of  a  round 
wrought  iron  bar,  1  in.  in  diameter.  The  bar  was  placed  in  a 
testing  machine,  and  loads  applied  in  uniform  increments. 
Extensions  corresponding  to  the  loads  were  measured  by  means 
of  a  Ewing's  Extensometer,  the  units  of  whose  scale  correspond 
to  sloths  of  an  inch. 

The  following  are  the  loads  and  the  corresponding  extensions 
as  given  by  the  extensometer  readings : — 


Loads  —  Tons 

0 

i 

1 

1J 

2 

2i 

3 

3i 

4 

44 

5 

Readings 

o-oo 

O'll 

0-31 

0-51 

0-71 

0-92 

1-12 

1-33 

1-53 

174 

1-95 

Loads  —  Tons 

5i 

6 

64 

H 
/ 

71 

8 

8| 

9 

»4 

10 

Readings 

2-15 

2-35 

2-56 

2-76 

2-97 

3-18 

3-40 

3-62 

3-83 

4-05 

These    readings    are    shown    plotted   on    the    accompanying 
diagram  (Fig.  3). 


STRESS,  STRAIN,  AND  ELASTICITY 


9 


To  find  the  elastic  modulus,  take  pairs  of  readings  having 
differences  in  loads  of  5  tons  : 


4-05      3-83      3-62      3'40      3'18     2'97      2'76 
1-95      174      1-53      1-33      1-12        '92        '71 


'51 


2'35     2'15 
'31        '11 


2-10      2-09      2-09      2-07      2  "06      2  '05      2  "05      2  "05      2_04      2  '04 

The  total  for  ten  readings  being  20*64,  the  average  extension 

2-064  . 

for  a  difference  in  load  of  5  tons  is    r._    ms. 

500 

TONS 

15 


10 


O  002 


0  004 


0-006 


0008 


0-010 


FIG.  3. — Load-extension  diagram  for  a  bar  of  wrought  iron. 
Loads  vertical.     Extensions  horizontal. 


Since  within  the  limits  of  the  experiment  strain  is  proportional 
to  stress, 

let  /  =   stress  in  the  material. 
I   =   original  length. 
x   =   extension  produced  by/. 
E    =   elastic  modulus  (Young's  Modulus). 


10 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


If  the  bar  is  extended  an  amount  x  for  an  increase  of  stress  /, 
it  will  be  stretched  an  amount  I  by  a  stress  E,  or, 

E   =  • — ,  as  before. 
x 

.        5  tons  x  2240  ,, 
f  07854    "  lbs'  Per  «!•  m' 

I   =   8   ins.    (the   measured   length   on   the  Ewing   instru- 
ment). 
2-064  . 
X  = 


E   = 


5  x  2240  x  8  x  500 


0-7854x2-064 
=   27,600,000  lbs.  per  sq.  in. 

Example  2.  —  A  compression  experiment  on  a  circular  cast 
iron  bar. 

Diameter  of  bar  1/244  ins.     Total  length,  2  "5  ins. 

Eeadings  were  taken  on  1'25  ins. 

A  Ewing's  Extensometer  was  used  to  measure  the  compres- 
sions, the  units  of  whose  scale  are  -g-^nr^h8  °f  an  inch. 

Table  of  Loads  and  Compressions.     (For  diagram,  see  Fig.  4.) 

Load  increasing : 


Load  in  tons 

i 

2 

4 

6 

8 

10 

12       14 

16 

18 

20 

22 

Readings,      \ 
TOTO  in-    •/ 

0 

0-6 

1-4 

2-22 

3-03 

3-84 

4-7      5'6 

6-57 

7-73 

9-18 

11-3 

Loads  decreasing : 


Loads  in  \ 
tons  .  .  / 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

* 

Readings,  ^ 
v-fa-t  in.  J 

11-3 

10-72 

10-05 

9-37 

8-68 

7-95 

7-2 

6-42 

5-63 

4-76 

3-91 

2-95 

The  bar  was  loaded  up  to  22  tons  in  steps  of  2  tons,  and  the 
compressions  noted  (see  first  table).  Then  the  loads  were  taken 
off  and  the  extensions  noted  (see  second  table).  To  find  the 


STRESS,  STRAIN,  AND  ELASTICITY 


11 


average  compression,  the  bar  was  taken  as  being  elastic  up  to  12 
tons,  and  the  following  differences  were  taken : 


4-7 
2-24 


3-84 
1-4 

2-44 


3-03 
0-6 

2-43 


The  average  compression  or  differ- 
ence in  length  for  6  tons  load 
=    2-44  units, 

2-44  . 

Wbich       =    2500  mS" 
=    x 


TONS 
25 


to 


0-0008"        0-0016"        0-0024"      0-003Z"     0-0040"      00048 

FIG.  4. — Load-compression  diagram  for  a  cast  iron  bar. 
Loads  vertical.     Compressions  horizontal. 


From  which — 


6x2240x1-25x2500 

(1-244)2  x  0-7854x2-44 

=    14,160,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 


12 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


Example  3. — Find  the  amount  of  stretch  of  a  copper  trolley 
wire  under  a  working  stress  of  \  ton  per  sq.  in.  in  a  length  of 
400  yds. 

Diameter  of  wire    =    \  in. 

E  =    16,000,000. 

Working  stress  =  \  ton  per  sq.  in.  =  1120  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 
Let  x  —  amount  of  stretch  in  inches. 


1120x  400x3x12 


=    1-008  ins. 
Answer:  Amount  of  stretch  =  T008  ins. 

The  following  two  examples  will  serve  to  show  how  calcula- 
tions are  made  which  involve  the  use  of  E  for 
two  materials  which  are  under  stress  at  the 
same  time : 


i 


FIG.  5. 


Example  4. — (See  Fig.  5.) — A  steel  bolt 
2  ins.  in  diameter  passes  through  a  cir- 
cular casting  4  ins.  in  diameter  and  10 
ins.  long.  Find  how  far  along  the  screw  the 
nut  will  have  to  travel,  after  it  just  touches 
the  casting,  in  order  to  put  a  tension  of  5 
tons  per  sq.  in.  on  the  bolt. 

E  for  steel          =  30,000,000  per  sq.  in. 
„     cast  iron  =  15,000,000     „ 

Let  the  bolt  be  stretched  an  amount  x^ 
„    the  casting  be  shortened  an  amount  #2 
„    area  of  section  of  bolt  be  a^  =  314  sq.  ins. 
„    area  of  section  of  casting  be  a2  =  9 '42  sq.  ins. 


The  total  tensile  load  on  the  bolt  must  equal  the  total  compressive 
load  on  the  casting.     Let  this 

=W=/,x  «,=./>, 

where      ft   =   the  tensile  stress  on  the  steel, 

fc   =   the  compressive  stress  on  the  cast  iron. 


STRESS,  STRAIN,  AND  ELASTICITY 

ftl          5  x  2240  x  10 


13 


30,000,000 


=   0-00373  in. 


and 


a,     I 


5x3-14x2240x10 
9-42  x  15,000,000 


=   0-00248  in. 


The  total  movement  of  the  nut  down  the 
screw  is 

^+#2   =    0*00621  in. 

Example  5.  —  (See  Fig.  6.)  —  A  pillar  of 
ferro-concrete  is  3  ft.  long,  10  ins.  by  12  ins. 
cross-section.  There  are  four  bars  of  steel 
If  ins.  diameter  running  from  end  to  end. 
The  total  load  on  the  pillar  is  50  tons.  Find  the 
load  carried  by  the  steel  and  the  load  carried  by 
the  concrete. 

E  for  steel         =   29,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 
E  for  concrete   =     1,860,000 

Let  Ws,  Wc  be  the  loads  on  the  steel  and  con- 
crete respectively. 

xg,  xc  be  the  compressions  on  the  steel  and 
concrete. 


W 


i 


FIG.  6. 


as  =  Area  of  steel         =  07854  x  (175)2x4 

=  9 '6  2  sq.  ins. 

ac  =  Area  of  concrete   =  120-9 '6 2 

=  110-38  sq.  ins. 


For  the  steel, 
For  the  concrete, 


W  x36 

S 


9-62  x  29,000,000 


x    = 


Wc  x  36 


110-38x1,860,000 


but  x  must  =  a?.. 

s  c 


Wgx36 


Wcx36 


9-62  x  29,000,000         1 10-38  x  1,860,000 


j^. 

OF  THE  \ 

/ERSITY  ) 

OF  / 


14  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

or,  W,          9-62x2900          1-355 

w;  ~~''    110-38~x~186   =       1 

50  x  1-355 
Wg   =    — «-^r«-      -    28-77  tons. 


Lateral  Contraction  and  Dilatation. — When  an  elastic  body 
is  extended  under  a  tensile  stress,  it  is  found  that  a  lateral 
shrinkage  takes  place.  If  the  longitudinal  strain  is  called 
0,  and  the  lateral  strain — that  is,  the  ratio  of  the  diminution  in 
thickness  to  the  original  thickness — is  called  0,  then  it  is  found 


FIG.  7. — Poisson's  Ratio. 

that  for  a  given  material  there  is  a  constant  relation  existing 

between  these  two.     Thus,  if  0  =  T  and  d>  =  — -=— ,  then  u  = 

I  cL  (p 

where — is  known  as  "Poisson's  Katio."     For  indiarubber  a  is 

M 

found  by  experiment  to  have  a  value,  for  small  strains,  of  2. 
For  hard  solids  it  varies  from  3  to  4,  the  latter  value  being 
that  of  the  metals.  It  will  be  seen  at  a  later  stage  that  Poisson's 
Eatio  becomes  of  especial  importance  when  theoretical  relations 
have  to  be  established  between  Young's  Modulus  for  direct  stresses 
and  the  corresponding  constants  for  shear  and  volumetric  varia- 
tion. The  meaning  of  the  above  is  illustrated  on  Fig.  7. 


CHAPTEE    II 
DIRECT,   TANGENTIAL,  AND  OBLIQUE  STRESSES 

THE  stress  referred  to  so  far  has  been  either  simple  direct  stress, 
as  in  tension  and  compression,  or  simple  shear  stress.  If  an 
imaginary  plane  surface  in  a  body  in  a  state  of  stress  be  taken 
anywhere  in  the  material,  the  stress  upon  it  may  be  either  wholly 
normal,  as  in  Fig.  8  (a) ;  wholly  tangential,  as  shown  at  (6) ;  or 
it  may  be  inclined  to  a  normal  to  the  surface  at  an  angle  a  (c). 
The  first  two  cases  are  quite  simple.  In  the  last  case,  the  oblique 
stress  /  may  be  resolved  into  its  two  components,  one  acting 


iUJlii 


(I) 

FIG.  8. 

normally  to  the  surface,  and  the  other  tangentially.  The  normal 
component  may  be  compressive  or  tensile.  These  normal  and 
tangential  components  will  have  the  following  values  : 

The  oblique  stress  being  called  fr, 

The  normal  component  stress  fn   =  fr  cos  a,  and 

The  tangential  component  stress  fs   =  fr  since. 

Stress  on  an  Area  not  at  Right  Angles  to  the  Axis  of  a 
Body  under  Simple  Tension  or  Compression. 

In  Fig.  9,  a  prismatic  body  is  subjected  to  a  direct  load  P 
along  its  axis,  which  gives  rise  to  a  simple  direct  stress  on  an 

15 


16 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


area  XY  normal  to  the  axis.  What  will  be  the  character  and 
magnitude  of  the  stress  on  any  other  area  AB  inclined  to  the 
first  at  an  angle  a  ? 

In    the    first    place,    the   uniform   direct 
stress  on  the  normal  surface  XY  is 


1       / 

1     / 

A 

vJ/' 

1      ^x 

1 

1 

B 

where  P  is  the  whole  direct  load  (compressive 
or  tensile),  and  a  is  the  area  of  the  normal 
section  XY. 

The  oblique  stress  on  the  surface  AB  will 
be 

P  cos  a 

Jr    ~  a          ~  7t 


cos  a 


t 


P 
FIG.  9. 


This  oblique  stress  can  be  resolved  into  its 
normal  and  tangential  component  stresses. 
Thus,  the  normal  component 


/      =    f  cos  a 
/«  J r 

2 


P  cos  a  cos  a 


while  the  tangential  component  stress  is 


j^   =  f^  sin  a   = 
=  fsin  a  cos  a 

This  may  be  written,  --— ~— — . 


P  cos  a  sin  a 


Sin  2a  has  a  maximum  value 


when  2  a  =  90°,  or  a  =  45°.  So  that  the  shear  stress  fs  has  "its 
greatest  value  when  the  angle  between  the  two  normals  is  45°, 
and  when 


Effect  of  two  Direct  Stresses  at  Right  Angles. 

Consider  a  cube,  BODE  (Fig.  10),  the  area  of  whose  face  is  (a). 
Let  two  pairs  of  normal  forces,  P'  and  P'',  act  on  pairs  of  opposite 


DIRECT,  TANGENTIAL,  AND  OBLIQUE  STRESSES      17 


faces,  and  let  compressive  forces  be  plus  and  tensile  force  minus. 
The  intensity  of  stress  on  BC  and  ED  is 

PX 
I    M 


f. 

J 


and  on  BE  and  CD, 


Consider  the  effect  of  these  in 
producing  stress  on  any  other 
section  LM  taken  through  the 
centre  and  normal  to  the  plane  of 
the  paper. 

The  normal  stress  on  LM  due  to  P7  is 


B 


FIG.  10. 


where  a  is  the  angle  between  the  direction  of  P'  and  the  normal 
to  LM.     Similarly, 

/"„    =/"  cos  s(|--«) 

///      •       o 
sm2a 

Therefore,  the  total  normal  stress  on  LM  is 

/.  =/'„+/*„ 

=  f '  cos  2  a  +  f"  sin  2  a 

Similarly,  the  tangential  stress  on  LM  due  to  P' 
=  f'g    =  f  sin  a  cos  a 

tending  to  cause  the  part  MBEL  to  slide  in  the  direction  M  to  L. 
Also  the  tangential  stress  due  to  P"  is 

/•//  /•//    .      /37T          \  /3?r          \ 

J  $    ----    J    sin  ( -^-  +  a)  cos   (—  +  a) 

=     -  f"  sin  a  cos  a 

Therefore  the  total  tangential  stress  on  LM  due  to  P'  and  P''  is 

f    -  -    f   j_  f" 

J$    -   J  s   +J    s 

=  f  sin  a  cos  a  -  f"  sin  a  cos  a 

-    (/'  -  /")  sin  a  cos  a 

The  value   of   this   tangential   stress   attains  a  maximum  when 
sin  a  cos  a  is  a  maximum :  that  is  to  say,  when  a  =  45°. 

B 


18 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


When  the  tangential  stress  is  a  maximum,  and  a  =  45°,  the 
total  normal  stress, 

fn     --  f  cos  2  45°  +  /"  sin  2  45° 

-  Kf  +/") 


Nature  of  Shear  Stress.  —  In  Fig.  11  (a)  is  shown  a 
piece  of  material  rigidly  held  in  sockets  near  its  ends.  These 
sockets  are  being  forcibly  moved,  the  upper  one  to  the  right 
and  the  lower  one  towards  the  left.  The  effect  is  to  give  rise  to 


(*) 


A     -_v    B 


B 


C          D 


FIG.  11. 


shearing  stresses  on  planes  at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  the  bar, 
shown  in  the  figure  by  AB  and  CD.  Consider  a  small  cube 
of  the  material  between  these  two  planes  (Fig.  11  (&)).  On  the 
upper  and  lower  faces  of  this  cube  there  will  be  a  pair  of  equal 
and  opposite  shearing  stresses  /s,  one  acting  in  the  direction  AB 
and  the  other  from  C  towards  D.  The  tendency  of  this  pair  of 
stresses  is  to  rotate  the  cube  in  the  direction  ABCD,  there  being 
a  couple  of  a  magnitude  equal  to  the  stress  fs,  multiplied  by  the 


DIRECT,  TANGENTIAL,  AND  OBLIQUE  STRESSES      19 

vertical  distance  between  AB  and  CD.  This  rotation  does  not 
take  place,  so  that  there  must  be  a  couple  of  equal  magnitude 
acting  in  the  opposite  direction,  to  keep  the  cube  in  the  given 
position.  This  couple  consists  of  a  second  pair  of  stresses  acting 
on  the  two  faces,  AD  and  CB,  of  the  cube,  and  as  the  arm 
of  this  couple  is  equal  to  that  of  the  first,  it  follows  that  the 
intensity  of  the  stresses  on  AD  and  CB  must  be  the  same  as 
those  on  AB  and  CD. 

Next  consider  one  pair  of  these  four  stresses  acting  on  adjacent 
faces  of  the  cube,  namely,  those  on  AB  and  CB  respectively. 
These  are  forces  of  equal  magnitude,  acting  in  directions  at  right 
angles  to  one  another.  The  direction  of  their  resultant  will  bisect 
the  angle  between  them,  arid,  by  the  parallelogram  of  forces,  will 
have  a  magnitude  equal  to 

Pt   -      VT/.AB 

Thus  the  pair  of  stresses  will  result  in  a  single  force,  acting  in  a 
direction  from  D  to  B,  and  tending  to  pull  half  of  the  cube,  ABC, 
away  from  the  other  half,  ADC.  In  other  words,  this  force,  Pp  in 
tending  to  cause  separation  across  the  plane,  AC,  is  exerting  a 
tensile  stress  on  this  surface,  which  is  resisted  by  the  internal 
stress  in  the  material,  preventing  separation  of  the  surfaces  from, 
taking  place. 

The  intensity  of  this  tensile  stress  will  be 


(area  on  which  the  stress  acts) 


x/2AB 


That  is  to  say,  there  will  be  a  tensile  stress  of  equal  intensity  on 
a  section  of  the  cube  taken  through  its  diagonal,  or  being  at  an 
angle  of  45°  with  the  direction  of  the  shearing  stress. 

By  precisely  similar  reasoning  it  can  be  shown  that  the  same 
shear  stresses  give  rise  to  a  compression  stress,  also  of  equal 
intensity  to  that  of  the  shear  stress,  on  a  section  taken  through 
the  other  diagonal.  This  is  shown  on  the  figure. 

The  fact  that  these  tangential  and  direct  stresses  do  exist 
at  the  same  time  is  very  clearly  demonstrated  in  the  testing  of 


20  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

several  kinds  of  material.  For  example,  in  the  torsion  test  to 
destruction  of  a  cast  iron  shaft,  failure  takes  place,  not  by  shear- 
ing, which  is  the  original  stress  induced  by  the  twisting,  but  by 
the  material  being  torn  asunder  across  a  surface  forming  a  spiral 
at  an  angle  of  45°  with  the  axis  of  the  shaft.  Here  the  tangential 
stress  is  accompanied  by  a  tensile  stress,  and  as  the  material  is 
more  ready  to  fail  by  pulling  than  by  sliding,  failure  takes  place 
in  this  way. 

Another  instance  is  to  be  found  in  the  failure  of  most  brittle 
materials  under  a  crushing  stress.  The  compressive  stress  induces 
shear  stresses  on  planes  inclined  to  the  direction  of  the  load,  and 
the  material  usually  fails  by  slipping  along  these  planes.  This  is 
found  to  occur  in  crushing  tests  of  such  materials  as  cast  iron, 
stone,  cement,  and  so  forth. 

In  mild  steel  tension  tests  the  fractures  most  often  take 
place  on  one  plane  forming  an  angle 
with  the  axis,  or  a  pair  of  such  planes 
forming  a  truncated  pyramid  and  a 
corresponding  recess.  In  the  case  of  a 
round  bar  the  fracture  takes  the  form 
of  an  incomplete  cone  and  cup. 

Shear  Strain — Modulus  of  Rigidity. 
— Let  a  cube  of  unit  length  of  side,  one  of 
whose  faces  is  the  square  BODE  (Fig.  12), 
FIG   12  be  subjected  to  a  uniform  shear  stress 

fs.     It  has  been  shown  that  on  the  pairs 

of  opposite  faces  there  will  be  stress  fs  along  CB,  fs  along  ED, 
fs  along  EB,  and  fs  along  CD.  Also  there  will  be  a  tensile 
stress  ft  acting  normally  to  the  diagonal  plane  EC,  and  a  com- 
pressive stress  fc  on  the  diagonal  plane  BD.  Moreover,  it  has 
been  shown  that 

/.=/«-  /, 

The  effect  of  the  shear  stress  is  to  distort  the  figure  from  the 
square  to  a  new  shape,  Bc^E,  the  lengths  of  the  sides  remaining 
unchanged.  CBc  is  called  the  angle  of  distortion.  Call  this 
angle  /3.  In  elastic  materials  the  angle  of  distortion  is  propor- 
tional to  the  shear  stress,  or 

£«•/, 

In  order  to  produce  distortion  through  an  angle  whose  value  in 


DIRECT,  TANGENTIAL,  AND  OBLIQUE  STRESSES      21 

circular  measure  is  unity,  it  is  necessary  to  apply  a  shear  stress 
G  where 

G_  J^ 

J  s  r* 

Js  shear  stress 

ft          angular  strain 

T 

G  is  called  the  Modulus  of  Rigidity,  or  'shear  modulus. 
It  is  clear  that  the  angle 

DBrf   =   A 

Next,  to  see  how  E  and  G  are  related 

It  is  obvious  that  when  BODE  is  distorted  into  the  shape 
Bft£E,  the  diagonal  BD  is  lengthened  so  as  to  become  l&d.  This 
lengthening  may  be  considered  to  have  been  brought  about  partly 
by  the  tensile  stress  in  the  direction  BD,  and  partly  by  the 
squeezing  caused  by  the  compressive  stress  in  a  direction  at  right 
angles  to  BD. 

The  elongation  in  direction  BD  due  to  /,  is 

/,BD 

E 
and  in  direction  BD  due  to  fe  is 

/CBD 

where          is    Poisson's    ratio    for    the    material    in    question. 

BD   =    \/TBC   =    \f~2. 1.     So  that  the  total  elongation, 

x/2 
*   =   ^E 


E 


Next,  consider  the  lengthening  of  BD  as  caused  by  the  distor- 


tion.    This  elongation  is 


x  =   Ed  -  BD 

=    2BC  cos  (^  -•£•)- 


|sin|-  +  cos|cos| 


22  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


But  for  very  small  angles, 


-4-1 


and  here 

BC   =    1 
so  that 


X 


and  also 

jj_f(t±*\ 

E'  s   \        ,,         I 
\      /*      / 

so  that,  finally, 

fs          x/T  _  /u  +  1 


G 


_ 

E          20*  +  1) 

In  the  case  of  the  metals,  where  p  =  4  (nearly), 

Cr  _2_ 

E    :       5 

That  this  is  true  may  be  shown  by  experiments  in  torsion  and 
tension  upon  samples  of  the  same  material. 

Elasticity  of  Volume  or  Cubic  Elasticity  (Fig.  13).  —  Let  all 
six  faces  of  the  cube  of  unit  length  of  side  be  pressed  upon  by  a 
uniform  stress  p,  which  in  this  case  is  a  pressure.  The  effect  of 
this  pressure  will  be  to  diminish  the  linear  dimensions  of  the  cube 
in  all  three  directions,  and  in  this  way  reduce  its  volume.  If  this 
decrease  in  volume  be  called  v  and  the  original  volume  V,  then 

the  volumetric  strain  will  be  -^,  and  =r  =  ^-,  where  K  is  a 

coefficient  called  the  Modulus  of  Cubic  Elasticity.     This  may  be 
written 

pressure  _JL 


volumetric  strain       — 


or 


DIRECT,  TANGENTIAL,  AND  OBLIQUE  STRESSES      23 

The  following  will  show  how  K  and  E  are  related : — 

Call  the  linear  strain  in  any  direction  parallel  to  one  edge  of 

the  cube  x,  due  to  the  pair  of  pressures  in  the  same  direction. 

There  will  be  a  retardation  or  a  dilatation  in  this  direction,  due  to 

the  other  two  pairs  of  pressures  in  directions  at  right  angles  to  the 

first  =  — 


B 


FIG.   13. 

X 

Thus  the  total  strain  in  direction  AB  =  x  —  2 — 


AC  =  x-2- 

u. 

A  T)    _   r        O  X 
»  ))  })  xxj_/    —  i/6 — —  — 

M 

For  volumetric  strain  the  total  diminution  is 


and 


but  V  =  1,  so  that  here 


K   = 


P    . 


(•-*-} 

\          p/ 


24  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

But  x  =  •£-  for  linear  strain,  so  that 

P 


K  = 

.E 


3/A-6 


Relation  bet-ween  E,  G,  K.  —  It  has  previously  been  shown 

that 

G  P 

E   " 

and  it  is  now  seen  that 
K 


E   "   3/x-6 

From  these  two  equations  the  relation  is  obtained  that 

6K  2G 

^     ~~   3K-E   ==   E-2G 
or  F  9KG 

"   3K  +  G 


CHAPTEE    III 


(V 


STRESSES  IN   BEAMS— BENDING  AND  SHEARING  ACTIONS 

THE  effect  produced  by  a  force  acting  normally  to  the  axis  of  a 
bar  or  prism  is  shown  in  Fig.  14. 

Here  is  a  bar  of  elastic  material  fixed  or  built  into  some  rigid 
substance,  and  in  this  way  forming  a  cantilever.  The  bar  is 
supposed  to  have  no  weight.  It  is  acted  upon  by  a  force,  P, 
pushing  upwards  at  its  outer  end  and  at  right  angles  to  its  axis. 

Consider  any  normal  sec- 
tion of  the  cantilever  at  AB.  •/////// //\  A 
The  effect  of  P  on  the  material 
in  the  plane  AB  will  be  two- 
fold. In  the  first  place,  the 
tendency  of  P  is  to  cause  that 
portion  of  the  cantilever  to  the 
right  of  AB  to  slide  upwards, 
as  shown  at  b,  leaving  the 
portion  to  the  left  stationary. 
The  force,  P,  with  which  the 
part  is  pushed  upwards  is 
called  the  shearing  force  on 
AB.  This  causes  shearing 
stress  on  the  plane  AB  and 
this  is  opposed  by  the  resistance  offered  by  the  material  to  sliding. 

There  will  thus  be  shear  stresses  on  the  vertical  section,  and, 
from  what  has  previously  been  said,  it  is  clear  that  there  must 
also  be  shearing  stresses  of  equal  magnitude  on  horizontal  planes 
taken  through  AB. 

The  precise  distribution  of  this  shear  stress  over  the  section 
of  the  beam  will  be  considered  more  in  detail  in  a  later  paragraph. 


(O 


FIG.  14. 


26  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

For  the  present,  it  will  be  sufficient  to  investigate  the  second  part 
of  the  effect  of  P. 

If  the  beam  were  to  be  cut  through  at  AB  the  shear  effect  of 
P  would  be  to  cause  actual  sliding  to  take  place.  When  this 
movement  is  prevented  by  the  application  of  a  downward  force 
Fs  =  P  acting  at  AB,  it  is  evident  that  the  further  tendency  of 
P  will  be  to  cause  a  separation  between  the  planes  at  the  lower 
part  of  the  section,  and,  if  there  should  be  an  opening  between 
these  at  the  top  of  the  section,  to  close  it.  That  is  to  say,  there 
will  be  a  tendency  to  sever  the  lower  fibres  by  tension  and  to 
crush  the  upper  fibres. 

If  x  is  the  perpendicular  distance  from  the  line  of  action  of  P 
to  the  section  AB,  then  the  bending  moment  on  the  section  is 

M  =  P  x  x 
In  the  present  simple  case  the  bending  moment  is  due  to  a 


i 


FIG.  15. 

single  force  P.  The  bending  moment  on  a  section  of  a  beam  is  in 
most  cases  due  to  a  number  of  such  forces,  to  a  uniformly  distri- 
buted load,  or  to  both.  It  will  be  sufficient  at  present  to  consider 
the  effect  of  a  bending  moment  M,  without  any  reference  to  the 
manner  in  which  it  is  produced. 

The  following  example  will  help  to  make  clear  what  is  the 
nature  of  the  stress  caused  by  bending  in  one  of  the  simplest 
cases,  namely,  one  in  which  the  bending  moment  is  resisted  by 
stresses  in  the  flanges  of  a  girder. 

Example. — A  bridge,  40  ft.  span  and  12  ft.  wide,  is  carried 
by  two  plate  girders  (Fig.  15).  The  total  load  per  sq.  ft. 
of  platform  is  7  cwts.  Stress  allowed  in  flange,  6J  tons  per 


STRESSES  IN  BEAMS  27 

sq.  in.,  depth  of  girder  4  ft.  6  ins.,  and  width  of  flange  12  ins. 
Find  the  thickness  of  flange,  t. 

Total  load  on  bridge  (40  x  12)  x  7 

~~20~~ 
=    168  tons. 

Total  load  on  one  girder 

=  W=    *|8    »    84  tons. 

The  bending  moment  is  greatest  at  the  centre,  and  is 

W      l          W      l 


w/ 


This  is  equal  to  the  moment  of  resistance 

=   (total  force  on  flange)  x  (depth  of  girder) 

=   (£.12.  6J)  x  (54),  inch-tons,  where  t  is  the  required 

thickness. 
Therefore 


t  12.6J.54   = 

or  _  84.40.12.4 

=  8.12.25.54 
=    1  14  ins.    =    1  J  ins.  say. 

In  the  example  just  considered,  it  is  assumed  —  which  is 
approximately  the  case  —  that  the  tensile  stress  in  the  lower 
flange  and  the  compressive  stress  in  the  top  flange  are  both 
uniform  over  the  flange  section. 

Where  the  section  of  the  beam  is  solid,  or  where  the  thickness 
of  the  flange  is  great  relatively  to  the  depth  of  the  beam,  the  fact 
that  the  stress  varies  from  point  to  point  must  be  taken  into  con- 
sideration. 

Distribution  of  Direct  Stress  in  a  Beam  Section. 

When  a  beam  is  curved  by  bending,  as  seen  in  Fig.  16,  it  is 
evident  that  the  layers  of  the  material  on  the  inside  or  concave 
surface  are  compressed  and  those  on  the  convex  surface  are  in  a 
state  of  tension.  Further,  it  is  not  difficult  to  see  that  these 


28 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


stresses  are  greatest  at  the  surfaces,  and  diminish  as  the  centre  of 
the  section  is  approached. 

If  the  portion  to  the  right  of  the  vertical  section,  CD,  were  to 
be  hinged  so  as  to  be  free  to  turn  about  a  point,  F,  it  would  tend 
to  revolve  in  the  direction  indicated  by  the  arrow.  This  tendency 
is  resisted  by  the  compressive  stresses  exerted  by  the  left-hand 
portion  on  that  part  of  the  section  OF  above  F  and  by  the  tensile 
stress  on  FD,  and  the  summation  of  the  moments  of  these  repre- 
sents the  moment  of  resistance,  which  is  equal  in  magnitude  but 
opposite  in  sense  to  the  bending  moment  of  the  external  forces. 

Those  stresses  above'  F  act  to  the  right,  and  those  below  to 


FIG.  16. 

the  left.  As  the  external  forces  are  wholly  vertical,  the  algebraic 
sum  of  these  horizontal  stresses  must  be  zero. 

Now  refer  to  Fig.  17. 

At  (a)  two  adjacent  and  parallel  sections,  AB  and  CD,  are 
shown  as  they  would  appear  on  the  unloaded  beam.  At  (b)  the 
same  portion  of  the  beam  is  shown  when  loaded. 

The  lines  AB  and  CD,  representing  the  sections,  now  appear 
to  be  no  longer  parallel,  but  inclined  to  one  another  and  meeting 
in  some  point  Q. 

This  convergence  of  the  lines  is  brought  about  by  the  shorten- 
ing of  AC  under  the  compressive  stress,  and  the  lengthening  of 
BD  under  tension.  C'D'  is  drawn  parallel  to  AB,  at  a  distance 
away  from  AB  equal  to  EF.  CD  and  CT)'  intersect  at  F. 

Consider  the  portion  below  EF.  The  fibres  of  the  material 
at  BD  will  have  been  extended  an  amount  DT),  and  in  a  fibre 
LM,  at  a  distance  x  from  EF,  the  extension  is  less.  The  material 
of  the  beam  is  supposed  to  be  elastic,  so  that,  as  the  stretch  of 
the  fibres  diminishes  in  amount  towards  the  centre,  the  stress  also 


STRESSES  IN  BEAMS 


29 


diminishes,  until  some  point  F  is  reached  where  there  is  no  longer 
any  elongation  and  the  stress  is  zero. 

Beyond  F  the  stress  changes  sign  and  becomes  compressive, 
increasing  in  amount  as  the  distance  from  F  towards  C  increases. 

The  surface  GH,  which  includes  all  points  where  there  is  no 


(*) 


FIG.  17. 

stress,  is  called  the  Neutral  Surface,  and  its  intersection  with  the 
plane  section  AB  is  a  line  NET,  called  the  Neutral  Axis. 

In  the  theory  relating  to  the  bending  stresses  in  beams  the 
following  assumptions  are  made : — 

1.  The  material  remains  elastic  under  all  stresses  imposed. 

2.  Its  elastic  modulus  is  the  same  for  tension  as  for  compression. 


30  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

For  iron  and  steel  experiment  shows  this  to  be 
practically  true.  In  the  case  of  such  materials  as  con- 
crete the  difference  is  not  great. 

3.  A  plane  section  of  the  learn,  normal  to  the  Neutral  Surface, 
suffers  no  distortion  when  the  learn  is  loaded  but  remains 
a  plane. 

This  means  that  the  straight  lines  AB  and  CD  in  the  figure 
remain  straight  when  the  beam  is  loaded.  The  extension  (or 
compression)  of  any  fibre  LM,  at  a  distance  FM  or  x  from  the 
neutral  axis  F,  is  MM',  which  forms  the  base  of  the  triangle 
FMM'.  This  is  one  of  a  series  of  similar  triangles  having  a 
common  apex  at  F. 

The  lengths  of  their  bases  are  proportional  to  their  altitudes,  x, 
and,  as  the  stress  is  proportional  to  the  extension  (or  compression), 
it  follows  that,  if  the  above  assumptions  be  sound,  the  stress  at  any 
point  must  le  proportional  to  the  distance  of  that  point  from  the 
neutral  axis. 

In  Fig.  17  (c)  let  KS  be  a  strip  of  the  section  of  the  beam  at 
AB,  drawn  parallel  to  the  neutral  axis  NIST,  at  a  distance  x  from  it, 
and  let  its  length  be  a  and  its  width  Sx. 

If  /  is  the  maximum  tensile  stress  at  the  edge  of  the  section 
farthest  from  NN,  and  at  a  distance  y  from  it,  and  q  is  the  stress 
on  the  strip,  then 

_q_  x_ 

/        y 

X       , 

or  q    =    —  /    =    ex 

yj 

where  c  is  a  constant. 

The  total  force  on  the  strip  is 

q  a  &r    =    c  x  a  8x 

and  the  total  force  on  the  section  is  the  integral 

c  I  a  x  dx 


Below  NN  this  is  tension,  and  above  NN  it  is  compression  ;  and 
as  the  whole  of  the  stress  on  the  section  acts  parallel  to  the 
neutral  surface,  and  the  external  forces  are  wholly  normal  to  this 


STRESSES  IN  BEAMS  31 

direction,  it  follows  that  the  algebraic  sum  of  the  direct  stresses 
on  the  section  must  be  zero,  or 


ilaxdx   =   0 


From  this  it  follows  that  the  line  from  which  x  is  measured, 
that  is  to  say,  the  neutral  axis,  must  pass  through  the  centre  of 
gravity  of  the  section. 

Moment  of  Resistance.  —  The  force  on  one  strip  being 


the  moment  of  this  force  about  the  neutral  axis  is 
=    q  a  8x  x    =    c  a  .r2  8x 

This   is    the   resisting   moment    of    one    strip.      The    moment   of 
resistance  of  the  whole  section  is  the  integral 


taken  between  the  limits  x  =  —  y  and  a;  =  -f  yv  y  being  the  distance 
between  the  neutral  axis  and  the  point  where  the  maximum  stress 
/  occurs,  and  yv  the  distance  from  the  neutral  axis  to  the  extreme 
edge  of  the  section  opposite  to  y. 

(Bending  Moment)  =  (Moment  of  Eesistance),  or 


+2/1 

M    =    c\       ax^dx 


but  c  =  — ,  and  the  integral 

y 


l 


is  the  Moment  of  Inertia  of  the  section  about  its  neutral  axis. 
Writing  this  as  I,  the  above  equation  becomes 

M    =   ^-l 

*  y 

M          J 
or          _.'..,£- 

i        y 

The  fraction    "      is  often  called  the  Modulus  of  the  Section,  and 

c/ 

is  usually  denoted  by  the  symbol  Z.     The  above  equation  then 
becomes  M   =  /Z 


32 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


Moments  of  Inertia. — The  moment  of  inertia  of  an  element 

of  area  SCD  about  any  axis  is  the  product  of  the  area  So)  and  the 

square   of    the   perpendicular    distance   of    its 

^^fo      centroid    from    the    axis.     Thus    in    the    case 

represented  in  the  accompanying  figure  (Fig. 

x  18)  the  moment  of  inertia 

i 
x  __<L__    Y  I   =   &o*2 

In  the  same  way,  the  moment  of  inertia  of 

an  area  which  can  be  split  up  into  a  number  of  such  elements 
is  the  summation  of  the  moments  of  inertia  of  the  several 
elements 

I   =   I  xz  do),  or  =  I  a  xz  dx 

where  adx  is  the  element  of  area. 

Where  the  area  in  question  is  a  regular  geometrical  figure  the 
integration  can  generally  be  effected, 
and  the  value  of  I  found  mathemati- 
cally. Thus  in  the  case  of  the  rect- 
angle on  Fig.  19,  its  I  about  its  own 
neutral  axis,  or  one  drawn  through 
its  centre  of  gravity,  is 

•+y 

a  x2  dx 


r 
=   1 


X     


when  a  =  b  =  constant,  and  y  —  - 


±y 


FIG.  19. 


Integrating, 


and  the  modulus 


-*K] 


2 
bd? 


This  case  occurs  very  frequently  and   the   result   should    be 
remembered. 


STRESSES  IN  BEAMS 


33 


The  moment  of  inertia  of  any  section  may  be  written  in  the 
form,  I  =  AF 

or  k2        — 

where  A  =  the  area  of  the  section  in  question, 

and  k  =  the  radius  of  gyration. 

The  radius  k  is  such  that  if  the  area  A  could  be  concentrated 
at  the  end  of  this  radius,  the  effect  would  be  the  same. 

The  following  rules  are  extremely  useful  when  moments  of 
inertia  have  to  be  found  of  areas  whose  figures  are  either  rect- 
angular or  elliptical,  or  are  complex  areas  made  up  of  these 
figures. 

1.  The  moment  of  inertia  of  an  area  about  an  axis  through 
its  centroid.  and  coinciding  with  or  perpendicular  to  one  of  its 
principal  axes,  is 

[(area  of  the  figure)  x  (the  square  of  the  rectangular  semi-axis)] 
~~3  or  4 

The  divisor  (3)  is  used  where  the  figure  is  rectangular,  and 
the  (4)  where  it  is  elliptical. 

Examples :  — 

(a)  Moment  of  inertia  of  a 
circle   about    its    diameter    (d     ^ 
=  2r),  Fig.  20. 

Here  the  semi-axes  are  the 
two  radii,  one  in  the  neutral 
axis  and  one  perpendicular  to 
it.  So  that,  FIG.  20. 


I   = 


irr- 


(b)  Similarly,  for  a  rectangle  of  width  (b)  and  deptii  (d)  about 
a  neutral  axis  parallel  to  (6),  Fig.  19. 

id\(i 


bd3 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


2.  The  moment  of  inertia  of  an  area  about  an  axis  other  than 
its  own,  but  parallel  to  it,  is  the  sum  of  (the  moment  of  inertia 
about  its  neutral  axis)  -f  (the  product  of  its  area  into  the  square  of 
the  perpendicular  distance  between  the  two  axes). 

Thus  (Fig.  21),  if  I  is  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  given  area 

about  its  neutral  axis,  A  its  area, 
h  the  perpendicular  distance  be- 
tween the  two  axes,  and  Ia  the 
moment  of  inertia  about  the  new 
axis  XY,  then 

I,  =  I  +  AA' 

/\     —   ~ —  — 

FIG.  21. 

3.  The  moment  of  inertia  of  a  complex  area  about  any  axis 

A        D 


"T 


X<M             I                ' 
'    ~~    1 1  


'I 

1 

1 

*-2~» 

1 

1 

E            H 

L           O  V« 

*  4         i           • 

1 

<M             1 

'   1—  '    'H 

r 

-|.  Y 

Y                   '                       ' 

F           G 

M           N 

1 

1 

1 

c 

1 
1 

1 

1 
U  12*  * 

FIG.  22. 

is  the  sum  of  the  moments  of  inertia  of  the  several  parts  about 
this  same  axis. 

If  Ij,  I2,  I3,  etc.,  are  the  respective  moments  of  inertia  about 
the  given  axis  of  the  several  parts  which  make  up  the  entire  area, 
and  I  is  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  whole,  then 
I  =  Ij  +  I2  +  I8  +   etc. 


STRESSES  IN  BEAMS 


35 


The  following  worked-out  examples  should  help  the  reader  to 
a  more  complete  appreciation  of  the  rules  which  have  just  been 
laid  down  :  — 


(12)3 


=   288 


Example  1. — To  find  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  section 
(Fig.  22)  about  XY,  its  neutral  axis. 

Moment  of  inertia  of  rectangle  ABCD  about 

the  axis  XY  .... 
Moment  of  inertia  of  rectangle  LMNO  about 

the  axis  XY  .... 
Moment  of  inertia  of  rectangle  EFGH  about 

the  axis  XY  is  same  as  that  of  rectangle 

LMNO 

Moment  of  inertia  of  entire  figure  about  the 

axis  XY 


1  n 


3 

10 
T 


T 


Modulus  of  section    = 


=  294-e  ( 

its  moment  of  inertia 


=    49-1 


E       L 


A.. 


_ 10 - 

M  P 


X ; *  — 


N 


O 


is     - 

Fig.  23. 


Example  2. — To  find  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  given  section 
about  its  neutral  axis  XY  (Fig.  23). 


36 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


Moment  of  inertia  of  rectangle  AD 

about  the  axis  XT  . 

Moment  of  inertia  of  rectangle  EL 

about  the  axis  XT  .  . 

Moment  of  inertia  of  rectangle  MNOP 

about  the  axis  XY'  .  . 

Moment  of  inertia  of  entire  figure 

about  the  axis  XY 


Modulus  of  figure    = 


2Jx(12)3         5x14 

:4 
:4 

12                    2 

12                     2 

10x(2)3         20 

12               3 

5x144         5x144 

20 

2                   2 

3 

0         2180         7      ft 

/inch-\ 

Units/ 

1                M 

its  moment  of  inertia 


726-6 

6 
121-1 


Example  3. — To  find  moment  of  inertia  of  same  section  as  last, 
but  about  neutral  axis  at  right  angles  (Fig.  24). 


T' 



*£                ^ 

i 

i 

> 

F     !        D 

i 

i 

H 

i 

i 

i 

Xvl 

^                                  N» 

1  Y 

1 

1 

i 

I 

1 

s 

1 

i  L 

s 

T     ;       0 

A_ 



.   

idi 

M 

„ 

N 

Fi 

G.  24. 

i 

Moment   of    inertia    of    rectangle 
ABCD  about  the  axis  XY 


12  x  (2 


125       9375 

«     +      8 


9500 


STRESSES  IN  BEAMS 


37 


Moment  of  inertia  of  rectangle 
STF  about  the  axis  XY 

Moment  of  inertia  of  rectangle 
LMNO  about  XY  is  the  same 
as  that  of  rectangle  ABCD  . 

Moment  of  inertia  of  entire  figure 
about  axis  XY 


2x(10)3         1000 


9500 

8 
9500 


9500 


1000 
6 


Modulus  of  section 


9500       1000 
4  6 

28500  +  2000 
12 

30500 
12 

=     2581*6   /inch-\ 
\  units/ 

moment  of  inertia 

=    338-8 


Example  4  (Fig.  25). — Section  of  brickwork  pier.     To  find  its 
moment  of  inertia. 


1  

A 

—  c 

?--- 

---  f  • 

—  ~i  — 

"    f" 
1 
1 

.-J  Y 

i 

s 

1 

1 
X     _  _ 

* 

f- 
i 

i 

.     i. 

c 

B 

I  ' 

FIG.  25. 

First,  to  find  the  centre  of  gravity  or  centroid  in  order  to  fix 
the  position  of  the  neutral  axis. 
Taking  moments  about  BC, 

(Entire  area)  x  g   =    (Area  AJ  x  3£  +  (Area  A2)  x  1 


38  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

18x31  +  6x1         69 
24  =    24 

=    2-875  feet 

The  moment  of  inertia  of  the  entire  area  about  XY  is 
I    =    (Moment  of  I  of  Ax)  +  (Moment  of  I  of  A2) 

f- 18  x  0-39)  +  (~~  +  6  x  3-52 

-   (13-50  +  7-02)  +  (2  +  21-1) 
=   43-60  feet-units. 


CHAPTER    IV 

GRAPHICAL  METHOD  FOR  DETERMINING  THE 
MOMENT  OF  INERTIA 

WHERE  the  shape  of  the  area  whose  moment  of  inertia  is  required 
is  that  of  one  of  the  simple  geometrical  figures,  such  as  a  square, 
rectangle,  triangle,  circle,  or  the  combination  of  a  number  of  these, 
there  is  little  difficulty  in  determining  the  required  value  by  the 
methods  which  have  just  been  described.  But  in  many  cases  which 
occur  in  practice  the  area  is  of  such  irregular  shape  that  the 
problem  cannot  be  attacked  mathematically,  and  a  graphical 
method,  depending  upon  the  following  principles,  must  be  em- 
ployed. 

It  has  previously  been  shown  (see  Fig.  17)  that  the  moment  of 
resistance  is  equal  to  the  integral 

- —  a  j?2  dx 

Here,  it  will  be  remembered,  /  is  the  maximum  stress  at  a 
distance  y  from  the  neutral  axis,  and  a  is  the  length  of  the  strip 
which  forms  the  element  of  area.  The  above  integral  may  be 
written 


The  actual  stress  on  the  element  in  question  is  —  /,  or  /  reduced 

u 

in  the  proper  ratio, — . 

y 

Now,  without  altering  its  value,  the  same  integral  may  be 
written  as 


/[f -][/* 


89 


40 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


The  meaning  suggested  by  this  way  of  expressing  it,  is  that  instead 

x 
of  reducing  the  stress  in  the  ratio  of  — ,  the  length  of  the  strip  is 

u 

reduced  in  the  same  ratio,  and  the  stress  is  taken  as  having  the 
constant  value/.  In  other  words,  the  force  due  to  a  reduced  stress 
acting  on  the  actual  element  of  area  (a  8x)  is  replaced  by  a  force 
consisting  of  the  original  maximum  stress  acting  on  a  reduced  area. 
The  ratio  of  reduction  is  the  same  in  both  cases,  so  that  the  total 
force  on  the  strip  must  be  the  same. 

If  this  reduction  is  made  in  each  element  of  area  of  which  the 
original  section  is  composed,  these  new  elements  added  together 
will  make  up  a  new  figure,  called  the  modulus  figure.  The 


FIG.  26. 

original  maximum  stress  /  acting  on  this  area  will  give  a  moment 
of  resistance  equal  to  the  one  represented  by  the  above  integral. 

The  resultant  of  the  uniform  stress  on  the  modulus  figure  must 
pass  through  the  C.G.  of  this  figure. 

The  moment  of  resistance  on  one  side  of  the  neutral  axis  will 
then  be 

=  /  x  (area  of  modulus  figure)  x  (distance  of  its  C.G.  from 

the  neutral  axis) 
=  /xZ 

The  actual  way  of  finding  the  modulus  graphically  is  as 
follows : — 

Consider  any  figure  as  shown  in  the  accompanying  sketch, 
Fig.  26. 


METHOD  FOR  DETERMINING  MOMENT  OF  INERTIA    41 

(1)  Find  the  centre  of  gravity.  This  is  most  conveniently 
done  by  cutting  out  the  figure  in  thin  cardboard  and  balancing  it 
above  a  knife  edge  in  two  positions,  roughly  at  right  angles  to 
one  another.  The  intersection  of  the  two  lines  about  which  the 
figure  balances  will  be  the  required  C.G. 

(2j  Draw  the  neutral  axis  XY  through  the  C.G.  at  right  angles 
to  the  direction  in  which  the  load  is  applied. 

(3)  Draw   a   base-line   BL   parallel   to   the   neutral    axis   and 
touching  the  figure  at  the  point  distant  farthest  from  XY,  this 
distance  being  y,     Also  draw  a  second  base-line  BL  on  the  other 
side  of  XY  and  the  same  distance,  y,  from  it. 

(4)  Draw  a  number  of  lines,  as  CD,  parallel  to  XY  and  cutting 
the  boundaries  of  the  figure  at  C  and  D.     Drop  perpendiculars 
CE  and  DF  on  to  BL. 

Join  E  and  F  to  G.  The  lines  thus  drawn  will  cut  CD  in  H 
andK. 

C  and  D  are  points  on  the  boundary  line  of  the  original 
figure ;  H  and  K  will  be  the  corresponding  points  on  the 
modulus  figure.  The  remaining  points  are  to  be  found 
in  the  same  way.  By  following  out  this  construction 
throughout,  the  two  shaded  modulus  figures  will  be 
obtained.  These  are  such  that  a  "constant  stress  upon 
them  equal  to  the  maximum  stress  f  will  have  the  same 
effect  as  the  varying  stress  on  the  original  figure,"  by 
reason  of  the  proof  already  given. 

(5)  As  the  nature  of  the  stress  on  one  of  these  areas  is  tensile 
and  on  the  other  compressive,  and  as  the  algebraic   sum  of  the 
forces  acting  at  any  point  of  the  beam  parallel  to  its  axis  is  zero, 
it  follows  that  the  area  of  the  modulus  figure  above  XY  must  be 
equal  to  the  portion  below  XY. 

(6)  Measure  the  two  areas.     This  is  most  conveniently  done  by 
using  a  planirneter. 

Call  the  area  above  XY  o^,  and  the  one  below  XY  o>2. 
When  the  two  areas  have  been  measured,  a>x  should  be 
equal  to  w2.  The  difference  ought  not  to  be  more  than 
1  per  cent. 

This  equality  of  the  two  areas  provides  an  excellent  check  on 
the  accuracy  of  the  previous  work.  When  their  difference 
is  found  to  be  too  great,  the  finding  of  the  C.G.  of  the 


42 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


original  figure  and  the  construction  used  for  obtaining  the 
modulus  figures  must  be  revised  or  repeated. 

(7)  Find  the  centres  of  gravity  of  the  two  modulus  figures. 
It  will  be  found  most  convenient  to  cut  out  the  figures  in  card- 
board and  balance,  as  in  the  case  of  the  original  figure.  Call  the 
distances  of  these  C.G-.'s  from  XY  respectively  kl  and  h2. 

Then  the  moment  of  resistance  about  XY  will  be 


FIG.  27. 


the  resultant  of  the  total  force  on  each 
modulus  figure  acting  at  its  C.G.,  and 
the  arms  of  the  moments  being  Ax 
and  hy 

But  (01  =  co2  =  w,  so  that  the  moment 
of  resistance  is 


Here  the  modulus  Z,  is  represented  by 
wXJ. 

It  is  rarely  that  o^  comes  out  quite 
equal  to  eo2.    When  they  are  sufficiently 
alike,  co  must  be  taken  as  their  mean  value. 

To  find  the  moment  of  inertia  when  the  modulus  has  been 
determined,  it  is  only  necessary 
to   multiply   Z   by  the   distance 
from  the  neutral  axis  to  the  base- 
line, or 

I   =   Zy 

Where  the  figure  is  symmetri- 
cal about  the  neutral  axis,  y  =  yl 
and  the  base-lines  touch  the  figure 
at  both  the  top  and  the  bottom. 

Several  examples  of  the  mod- 
ulus figures  for  symmetrical  areas 
are  given  below.  Of  these, 

Fig.  27  shows  the  modulus 
figure  for  the  rectangle  shown  on  Fig.  19. 

Fig.  28   shows  the  modulus  figure   for   the   circle  shown  on 
Fig.  20. 


i 

FIG.  28. 


METHOD  FOR  DETERMINING  MOMENT  OF  INERTIA    43 


Fig.  29  shows  the  modulus  figure  for  the  section  shown  on 
Fig.  22. 


Hf J 


FIG.  29. 


FIG.  30. 


Fig.  30  shows  the  modulus  figure  for  the  section  shown  on 
Fig.  24. 


FIG.  31. 

Fig.  31  shows  the  modulus  figure  for  the  section  shown  on 
Fig.  23. 

In  cases  where  the  original  figure  is  not  symmetrical  about  the 
neutral  axis,  as  in  Fig.  26,  the  modulus  figures  must  be  constructed 
from  base-lines  at  a  distance  from  the  neutral  axis  corresponding 
to  the  point  where  the  maximum  stress  of  greatest  importance 
occurs. 

For  instance,  the  area  on  Fig.  32  represents  the  section  of  a 


44 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


cast  iron  frame.  Cast  iron  is  known  to  be  much  weaker  in  tension 
than  in  compression,  and  it  is  therefore  necessary  to  design  the 
section  on  the  basis  of  a  maximum  safe  tensile  stress.  This  occurs 
at  the  edge  of  the  large  flange,  and  the  base-line  must  be  taken  at 
the  distance  of  this  edge  from  the  neutral  axis. 

The  modulus  will  have  a  value  differing  according  to  which 
base-line  is  used. 


i 

y, 

\ 

\ 
-i- 


\ 


FIG.  32. 

It  is  to  be  noted,  however,   that  the  value  of   the  moment 
of  inertia  will  be  the  same  whichever  base-line  is  used. 
Thus,  in  an  unsymmetrical  section,  let 

y  =  distance  of  one  base-line  from  neutral  axis ; 

Z  =  the  modulus  as  found  from  this ; 

2/x  =  distance  of  other  base-lines  from  neutral  axis ;  and 

Zx  =  the  corresponding  modulus. 

Then,  the  moment  of  inertia 
From  which  Zl          y 

z    =  y~i 

or         Zx   =   Z  — 

In  this  way  Zl  can  be  found  from  Z  by  multiplying  it  by  the 
inverse  ratio  of  the  /s. 

The  two  pairs  of  modulus  figures  giving  Z  and  Zx  are  shown 
for  the  section  in  Fig.  32. 

The  examples  given  here  of  the  finding  of  the  modulus  in  the 
cases  of  areas  made  up  of  regular  geometrical  figures  are  chiefly 
given  for  the  purpose  of  showing  how  the  method  is  carried  out. 


METHOD  FOR  DETERMINING  MOMENT  OF  INERTIA    45 

As  a  rule,  for  figures  of  this  type  it  is  much  easier,  and,  at  the 
same  time,  more  accurate,  to  find  the  modulus  by  calculation  in 
the  manner  already  explained. 

On  Fig.  33  is  shown  a  good  typical  example  of  the  kind  of 


FIG.  33. 

area  in  which  it  is  not  possible  to  find  Z  by  calculation,  namely, 
that  of  a  tram-rail  section. 

The  modulus  has  in  this  case  been  found  as  described,  working 
from  the  tension  base-line  at  the  lower  edge  of  the  flange. 

It  is  sometimes  found  convenient,  though  not  necessary,  to 


46  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

"  mass  together "  a  separated  section.  In  the  above  case  it  is 
split  by  the  groove  in  which  the  flange  of  the  wheel  runs. 

This  "  massing "  is  done  by  drawing  a  number  of  horizontal 
lines  across  the  part  to  be  dealt  with,  and  transferring  the  out- 
standing widths  to  the  solid  part,  as  indicated  in  the  drawing. 
The  new  part  thus  formed  is  shown  by  the  dotted  line.  This 
process  does  not  alter  the  value  of  the  modulus  about  a  neutral 
axis  parallel  to  these  horizontal  lines. 

The  actual  measurements  taken  from  Fig.  33  were  as  follow  :— ~ 


Area  of  modulus  figure. 
Three   measurements  were^ 
made   on   each  side  theV 
neutral  axis 


Top. 

3-89 
3-87 
3;89 
3-88 


Bottom. 
3-89 
3-90 
391 
3-90 


means 


The  average  of  the  two  means  so  obtained  is  3  '89  sq.  ins. 
J  was  measured  as  5  '61  ins.,  and  y  as  3  '425  ins.  From  these 
the  modulus 

Z   -   3-89x5-61 

=    21-82  inch-units, 


and  the  moment  of  inertia, 


I   =   Zx.y 

=    21-82x3-42 
=    74-74 


FIG.   34. 


The  modulus  figure  shown  on  Fig.  34  is  for  the  same  section  as 
that  previously  given  on  Fig.  25. 


CHAPTEE     V 

DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS 

IN  this  connection  the  first  thing  to  be  done  is  to  find  an  expres- 
sion for  the  radius  of  curvature  E  at  any  point  of  the  deflected 
beam,  this  curvature  generally  varying  from  point  to  point. 

In  Fig.  35,  which  is  similar  to  Fig.  17,  the  two  plane  sections 
AB  and  CD,  originally  parallel,  are  taken  sufficiently  near  to  one 
another  to  make  the  radius  of  curvature  sensibly  constant  from 
E  to  F.  The  effect  of  the  bending  is  to  cause  AB  and  CD  to 
become  inclined  to  one  another  and  to  meet  in  Q,  which  is  the 
centre  of  curvature  for  the  short  length  considered.  The  bottom 
fibres  are  lengthened  an  amount  D'D. 

Call  BD'  =  EF  =  AC'  =  L,  and  D'D  =  s. 


s       f 

Then  -T-  =  ^r,  according  to  Hooke's  Law. 
Li      & 

Now  C'D'  has  been  drawn  parallel  to  AB,  so  that  the  triangles 
QEF  and  FDT)  are  similar. 

T?T?          TVT) 
It  therefore  follows  that  -^-^  =  ^^, 

t^Jcj 

Here, 

EF  =  L, 

QE  =  E  (at  the  neutral  surface), 
DD'.  =  s,  and 


so  that  the  above  may  be  written, 

JL        _^_ 
"tt      :    % 

1    /  r.         f      M-. 

=     -^r—       but   ^-  =  — 

L  y    L  y       I  J 


47 


48 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


This  equation  is  fundamental  in  relation  to  the  deflection 
of  beams.  Its  meaning  is  that  the  reciprocal  of  the  radius  of 
curvature  of  the  neutral  surface  at  any  point  in  a  loaded  beam  is 
equal  to  the  bending  moment  at  this  point  divided  by  the  product 
of  the  elastic  modulus  of  the  material  and  the  moment  of  inertia 
of  the  section. 


FIG.  35. 

It  is  necessary  here  to  take  note  of  the  following  definitions : — 

1.  The  shearing  force  S  at  any  section  of  a  beam  is  the  algebraic 
sum  of  all  the  forces  normal  to  its  axis  acting  on  one  side  of 
the  section. 

For  the  sake  of  uniformity,  those  shearing  forces  which  act 
as  at  (a)  (Fig.  35)  are  taken  as  minus, and.  those  as  at  (5)  &splus. 


DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS 


49 


2.  The  bending  moment  M  at  any  section  of  a  learn  is  the  algebraic 
sum  of  all  the  moments  acting  on  the  beam  on  one  side  of 
that  section. 

Those  as  at  (a)  are  minus,  and  as  at  (b)  are  plus. 

Next,  to  find  the  deflection.  There  are  two  ways  of  doing 
this. 

First  Method. — CASE  I.  Deflection  at  the  end  of  a  cantilever 
carrying  one  concentrated  load. 


FIG.  36. 

It  is  only  necessary  in  what  follows  to  consider  the  curvature 
of  the  neutral  surface  (shown  by  strong  lines  in  the  figures). 

On  Fig.  36  is  shown  the  cantilever  in  question,  having  a  length 
I  and  carrying  a  single  load  W  at  its  outer  end.  Take  any  two 
adjacent  points  A  and  C  at  a  horizontal  distance  x  from  the  outer 
end,  and  at  a  distance  apart  Sx. 

D 


OF  THE 


•-. 

|    UNIVERSITY  | 


50  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

Radii  are  drawn  from  A  and  C  to  meet  in  Q,  and  corre- 
sponding tangents  from  these  points  cut  off  from  the  vertical 
line  through  the  outer  end  of  the  cantilever  a  short  length,  e. 
This  will  be  the  deflection  at  the  outer  end  due  to  the  curvature 
of  the  element  of  length  Sx.  The  total  deflection  A  will  be  the 
summation  of  all  these  increments  of  deflection,  from  a  point 
where  x  =  0  to  x  —  I. 

Now,  by  similar  triangles, 

8x_         j_ 
R"      :    x 

1  e 

or  ~rr    —         s 

R  x  6.r 

but  it  has  already  been  shown  that 

JL      M. 

TT     :    El 

rn,        ,  M  x  Sx 

Therefore  e  =     -^-r- 

&  i 

At  the  point  in  question,  the  bending  moment, 

M  =  ~Wx 
so  that 

W  a* 


El 

The  total  deflection  is  the  integral  of  this,  or, 

W   [i 


W/3        The  minus  sign  indicates  a 
3  E  I  downward  deflection. 

CASE  II.  Cantilever  loaded  uniformly.     (Fig.  37.) 
In  this  the  load  is  applied  uniformly  and  is  equal  to  w  units 
of  weight  per  unit  of  length.     As  before, 

M  x  8x 
"BIT 

But  the  bending  moment  at  the  point  AC  is 

M  =  (load  on  portion,  x)  X  (distance  of  the  C.G-.  of  this  load 
from  the  section), 

or 


DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS 


51 


so  that 


w  .r3 


2  El 
and  the  whole  deflection  is 


2El 


tr3  dx 


8EI 

W/3 

8E  I 


but  wl  =  W  where  W  is 
the  total  load. 


FIG.  37. 

The  same  method  can  be  used  for  supported  beams,  or  the 
above  two  results  may  be  utilised  as  follows : — 

CASE  III.  Beam  freely  resting  upon  two  supports  whose  distance 
apart  is  I,  and  carrying  a  concentrated  load  W  at  the  centre 
(Fig.  38). 


W 


FIG.  38. 

The   upward   reaction   at-  each  support  is  half  the  load,  or, 


-^-,  and  the  neutral  axis  is  horizontal  at  the  centre      The  beam 

2i 

can  therefore  be  regarded  as  made  up  of  two  similar  inverted 
cantilevers,  of  length  --,  and  loaded  at  their  outer  ends  with  up- 


52 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


W 

ward  forces  =  -~-.     The  vertical  distance  between  the  centre  and 

the  points  which  touch  the  supports  will,  from  the  former  of  the 
above  equations,  be 


3E1 

W/3 


CASE  IV.  Beam  resting  upon  two  supports  whose  distance  apart 
is  I,  and  carrying  a  uniformly  distributed  load  w  per  foot  run 
(Fig.  39). 


FIG.   39. 

The  total  load  W  =  w  .1 

The  beam  is  symmetrical  about  the  centre,  where  the  maximum 

deflection  will  occur.     The  reactions  at  the  support  =  —=-—.    The 

2t       2i 

beam  can  be  taken  as  a  pair  of  cantilevers,  each  starting  from  the 

W 

centre  and  having  an  upward  force  -~-  at  the  outer  end  or  support, 

W 

deflecting  it  upwards,  and  a  uniform  load  —  tending  to  deflect  it 

downwards. 

The  required  deflection   A  will  be  the  difference  between  the 
upward  and  the  downward  deflections  of   the  cantilever,  whose 

length  is  --,  that  is, 


3EI 


8EI 


5 
384 


W/3 
ET 


DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS 


53 


CASE  V.  Beam  fixed  horizontally  at  the  supports  and  carrying 
a  single  concentrated  load  "W  at  the  centre.  As  before,  the  span  is  I. 
(Fig.  40.) 

It  is  necessary  that  the  neutral  axis  be  held  perfectly  hori- 
zontal at  the  supports,  and  that  these  be  on  the  same  level. 

It  will  be  seen  that,  starting  from  A,  the  beam  is  first  deflected 
with  the  concave  part  facing  downwards,  up  to  some  point  C. 
After  this,  as  far  as  the  centre,  the  concave  part  is  upwards.  So 
that  at  C  there  is  a  change  in  the  direction  of  curvature.  The  two 
points  in  the  beam  where  this  occurs,  C  and  D,  are  called  points 
of  contrary  flexure. 


_ 


-I  — 


FIG.  40. 

As  there  is  no  curvature  at  C  and  D,  there  can  be  no  bending 
moment.  So  that  the  conditions  would  be  fulfilled  if  there  were 
to  be  flexible  joints  at  C  and  D,  or  if  the  middle  portion  CD  were 
to  be  suspended  by  links,  as  shown  in  the  lower  figure. 

The  beam  can  then  be  regarded  as  made  up  of  four  cantilevers : 

W 

AC,  EC,  BD,  and  ED.     The  same  force  -~-  pulls  down  on  the  end 

,  *• 
of  AC  as  pulls  upward  at  the  end  of  EC. 

As  the  change  of  curvature  is  gradual  at  C  and  D,  the  angle  of 
slope  of  the  end  C  of  AC  must  be  the  same  as  that  of  C  on  EC.  4 

The  four  cantilevers  are  then  in  all  respects  similar,  and  their 
deflections  A!  and  A2  must  be  equal. 


54  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

The  required  deflection  of  the  beam  at  its  centre  will  be  made 
up  of  these  two  added  together,  or, 

A  =  Aj+  A2=2A1 


=     9 


W 

2    V4 
3EI 

W/3 


192  EJ 


Second  Method. — The  second  way  of  treating  beam  deflections 
is  more  general  than  the  first,  and  is  based  upon  the  assumption 
that  for  a  curve  whose  abscissae  and  ordinates  are  respectively  x 

and  y,  the  second  differential  coefficient,  -—^  =^  where  E  is  the 

ctx       Jtc 

radius  of  curvature  at  the  point  xy.     This  is  a  very  slightly  modi- 
fied form  of  a  well-known  mathematical  result. 

It  has  already  been  shown  that  -rr-  =  =^,  so  that  the  above 

K       hii 

may  be  written 

d^          M  d*y 

-ft   =  or      E I  -J  +    =    M 

dx*         h,  I  ax2 


CASE  I.  Cantilever  of  length  I,  carrying  a  single  load  W  at  its 
ou'er  end  (Fig.  41). 

The  bending  moment  at  any  point, 

M  =  -  W  (/  -  x) 
First,  EIg   =   M=_w(/_ir) 

Now  integrate          E  j  |  =  _  w  /,  +  ^f  +  c  (a  constant)  . 

/j/)j 

~  is  the  tangent  of  the  angle  of  slope  of  the  curve  at  X.     When 

dii 

x  —  0,  ~  =  0,  as  the  line  is  horizontal,  and  therefore  C  must  =  0 
ax 

dii         W  I2 

also ;  when  x  =  I,  at  the  outer  end,  El-/  = 7:— 

dx 


DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS 


55 


Again  integrating,  ^  _  W  W  +  Wr»  +  fi 

^i  D 


2^  is  the  vertical  distance  of  any  point  below  the  horizontal 
through  the  support.  When  x  =  0,  y  =  0,  and  therefore  B  =  0,  so 
that 


y~  ~ 


6  El 


FIG.   41. 

The  deflection  at  the  outer  end  when  x  =  I  is 


_ 
= 


W/3 


3EI 


which  is  the  same  as  was  found  by  the  first  method. 

In  this  and  the  following  cases  the  diagrams  showing  the 
variation  of  the  shearing  force  S,  and  the  bending  moment  M, 
are  drawn  below  the  principal  figure. 


56 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


CASE   II.    Cantilever  of  length   I,   carrying  a  uniformly  dis- 
tributed load  w  per  foot  (Fig.  42). 

Here  the  total  load  is  W  =  wl,  and  the  bending  moment  at  any 
point  X  is 

M==  _w(i_v\(L^L\-    wl2    wix _^ 

First,  -p  T  d2y 


FIG.  42. 


Integrating,  this  gives 


,dy  ID  I2  x     w  I  x2     iv  x* 

dx^  --  2~  +~~2  ---  6~  +      ^  constant)  ; 

when  a;  =  0,  ^  =  0,  so  that  0  =  0. 
ax 


Integrating  again, 
w 


wlx*     10 


~-y  -  ,      g          24  +  B  (a  constant) ; 

when  x  =  0,  y  =  0,  so  that  B  =  0. 


DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS 


57 


At  the  extreme  outer  end  of  the  cantilever,  when  x  =  l,  the 

w  1B 
slope  is  —  „  -p  -..,  and  the  deflection  is 

wl± 


or,  in  terms  of  the  total  load, 


wl* 
8~I7 


W/3 


S     f 


M 


FIG.  43. 


CASE  III.  Beam  supported  at  ends  of  span  I,  and  carrying  a 
concentrated  load  W  in  the  centre  (Fig.  43). 

Measuring  x  from   the    left-hand    support    A,   the   bending 

W  Wl 

moment  at  any  point  x  is  M=  +-^\  and  at  the  centre  is  -- 


Nbw, 


58  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

Integrating, 
When 


E  j         =  +  C  (a  constant). 

dx  4 


_ 

=  ~  ~ 


therefore,  Q  =  W  P    ^ 

or  W/2 

16 

Then  dy  _Wrf     W/2 

dx        4         16 
Integrating  again, 


_   , 

E  I  y  =  -TT^  ---  T^i  —  h  B  (a  constant). 
<y         12         16 

When  a?  =  0,  y  =  0,  and  therefore  B  =  0. 
Then  the  deflection  at  any  point  x  is 

_W,r3    _  W/  2r 
^  ~  12ET     T6ET 

The  deflection  at  the  centre,  when  x  =  -~-,  is 

z 

W/3       W/3 
A  =  WWl  ~  32  El 

W/3 


48  El 

the  minus  sign  again  indicating  that  the  deflection  is  measured 
downwards. 

The  slope  -~-  is  for  that  portion  of  the  beam  between  the  left- 
hand  support  and  the  centre.  Beyond  the  centre  the  value  of  M 
is  different  owing  to  the  presence  of  W. 

At  the  left-hand  support  x  =  0,  and  the  slope 

.'_  dy      W  a-2        W/2 
1  ~  dx  ~  4E1       16  El 
W/2 
16  El 

From  the  symmetry  of  loading,  the  numerical  value  of  i  at  the 
other  support  is  the  same,  but  the  sign  is  changed — that  is, 

W/2 

* =  Tern 


DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS 


59 


CASE  IV.  Beam  supported  at  ends  of  span  I,  and  uniformly 
loaded  with  w  per  foot  run  (Fig.  44). 

Total  load  on  beam  =  W  =  wl 

ID  I 

Eeactions  at  supports,  Ex  =  E2  =  — — 

Zi 

Bending  moment  at  any  point  X  is 

M    = 
As  before, 


2  J*~(  wx  j-9- 


wl 


Integrating,      £ 

when 

therefore, 


FIG.  44. 


x-L     *_o 

2>    dx~    ()} 


constant), 


or 


60  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

SO  that  -n,  T  dy          wlx2       mr3      wl* 

dx   ~~     ~^~   "~6         24" 
Integrating  again, 

wlxB      wx*      wl3x         , 
E  ly  =  ~T2  ----  24  ----  24~  +     (a  constant) 

when  a?  =  0,  y  =  0,  and  therefore  B  =  0,  so  that  the  deflection  at  X  is 

IV  I  X*        WO? 


At  the  centre,  where  x  =  y,  the  deflection  is 

w;/4  ?r/4 


38E~48El 


384  El 

5       W/3 
"384     IT 
The  slope  at  any  point  X  is 

fa    ''      4  El  ~TEl  "  24^T 
at  the  left-hand  support  this  is 

~24EI 

CASE  V.  Seam  fixed  at  ends  of  span  I,  and  carrying  a  concen- 
trated load  W  in  the  centre  (Fig.  45). 

It  is  assumed  in  this  case  that  (a)  the  two  ends  of  the  free 
part  A  and  B  are  in  the  same  horizontal  line,  and  (&)  that  the  ends 
are  so  restrained  that  the  neutral  surface  is  horizontal  at  these 
points,  and  consequently  the  tangents  of  the  angles  of  slope, 


First,  suppose  the  beam  to  rest  freely  on  the  supports,  as  in 

W/2 
Case  III.     The  slope  at  the  supports  is  then  =       _ ... . 

A  bending  moment  M:  will  now  have  to  be  applied  at  each 
support,  in  order  to  bend  the  overhanging  ends  downwards,  as 

dij 
indicated  by  the  arrows,  until  ~  =  0. 


DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS 


61 


Neglecting  this  moment,  the  reactions  at  A  and  B  caused  by 

W 

W  are  =-«-•     The  bending  moment  at  any  point  of  the  beam  X  is 


M  =  —ft—  —  M!  when  Mj  is  the  moment  necessary  to  keep  the 

neutral  surface  horizontal  at  the  supports.     Every  part  of  the 
beam  is  subjected  to  this  same  moment. 

To  find 

Integrating, 


VVI 


M          fe 


FIG.  45. 


At  the    supports,  where  #="0,  :r  =  Q>  •'•  C  =  0;  when  x  =  -^ 
again  =  0,  and  0  =  -~    -  Mj  -^ 

or  M    ^W/ 

M!  -   -g- 


62  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

Then  „     d  W**     Vflx 


-T<r    -T6    +B 

When  x=0,  y  =  0,  and  B  =  0 

When 


6        64 /El 
W/3 
192  El 


The  deflection,  of  any  other  point  at  x  is 


y      El  \  12  "      16    J 

The  points  F  F  are  points  of  contrary  flexure,  where  the  curva- 
ture changes  and  there  is  no  bending  moment.     To  find  these,  put 

M   =-  0 

W  x     Wl 

•2    "T 

from  which  x        _/_ 

The  slope  at  any  part  is 

lx 


CASE  VI.  Beam  of  span  I  fixed  at  the  supports  and  uniformly 
loaded  with  w  per  foot  run  (Fig.  46). 

The  conditions  of  supporting  the  beam  are  precisely  similar  to 
those  in  the  last  case.      The  total  load  is  wl  =  W,  and  the  re- 

W     wl 

actions  at  the  supports  clue  to  this  alone  &?&=—-  =  —— 

Zi  Zi 

The  bending  moment  at  any  point  X  is 


2          2 
d*i/  _          wlx     '^2_M 

it  A  4  o  r 


DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS 


63 


di/ 
At  the  support,  where  x  =  Q,  -^  =  0 ;  .'.  0  =  0,  and,  at  the  centre, 

-¥  =  0 ;  and  x=-^-t  that  is 


from  which 


wl*      wl*  I 

1  -—"  Ml 


12 


7_ O 


M 


Then 


FIG.  46. 


,.,  ,  dy      ic I  x2      w  .r3      wl^ 
dx         4        ~~6        T2 


24 


when  a?  =  0,  y  =  0 ;  . '.  B  =  0,  and  when  a;  =  — 

A 


384  El 

W/8 
384  E  I 


64 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


The  slope  at  any  point  of  this  beam  is 

dy        1    iw  I  x2     w  x^     w  /2  x 


There  are  two  points  of  contrary  flexure,  where  the  bending 
moment  is  zero,  one  on  each  side  the  centre.  To  find  the  positions 
of  these,  put 

w  I  x     w  x2     wl2 


from  which 


which  are  the  distances  of  the  points  FF  from  A. 

—  / ,| 


R 


R* 


M 


FIG.   47. 

e  reactions  at  the  supports  in  the  case  of  a  learn 
uniformly  loaded  and  resting  upon  three  supports,  equally  spaced  and 
in  the  same  horizontal  plane  (Fig.  47). 

This  problem  is  best  solved  by  making  use  of  the  fact  that 
"  the  deflection  of  a  beam  acted  upon  by  several  loads  is  the  sum 
of  the  deflections  due  to  the  several  loads." 


DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS  65 

First,  suppose  the  centre  support  to  be  taken  away  and  the 
beam  to  rest  freely  on  the  remaining  supports,  whose  distance 
apart  is  /.  Then,  if  the  total  load  is  W,  the  deflection  in  the 

centre  is 

5  W/3 
A  ~  384  E  I 

Now,  raise  the  central  support  until  the  centre  is  restored  to  the 
level  of  the  outer  supports.  Call  the  force  required  to  effect  this 
P.  The  case  now  resolves  itself  into  an  upward  load  P  applied  in 
the  centre  of  a  freely  supported  beam  of  I  span,  and  producing  a 
central  deflection  =  A- 

Considered  from  this  point  of  view, 

P/3 
A~  48^1 

Also, 


__ 


__ 
384  E  I 

so  that  P/3  5      W[3 

48  El    "    384     El 
and  _  240 

"  384 


Case  of  a  cantilever  uniformly  loaded,  with  the  outer  end  resting 
on  a  support  at  the  same  level  as  the  fixed  end  (Fig.  48). 

This  may  be  treated  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  employed  in 
the  last  case.  By  equating  the  (downward  deflection  caused  by 
the  uniform  load  acting  on  the  free  cantilever)  to  the  (upward 
deflection  caused  by  a  load  at  the  outer  end),  this  isolated  load, 
which  is  the  reaction  on  the  support,  is  found  to  be  3/8  wl,  or 
3/8  W. 

The  point  of  contrary  flexure  is  3/4  I  from  the  outer  end,  or 
1/4  I  from  the  fixed  end. 

Example  1.  —  In  a  rolled  steel  beam  (symmetrical  about  the 
neutral  axis),  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  section  is  72  inch-units. 

E 


66 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


The  beam  is  8  ins.  deep,  is  laid  across  an  opening  of  10  ft.,  and 
carries  a  distributed  load  of  9  tons.  Find  the  maximum  fibre 
stress,  also  the  central  deflection,  taking  E  at  13,000  tons  per 
sq.  in. 


M 


FIG.   48. 


Let  A  =  deflection  in  inches ; 

M  =  bending   moment  in  inch-tons    (maximum   bendin 

moment) ; 

/  =  extreme  fibre  stress  in  tons  per  sq.  in. ; 
W  =  total  distributed  load  in  tons ; 
/  =  width  of  opening  in  inches ; 
y  =  distance    from    neutral    axis    to    extreme    edge 

section  in  inches ; 

I  =  moment  of  inertia  of  section  in  inch-units. 
The  maximum  bending  moment  occurs  at  the  centre,  and  is 

W/        9  x  10  x  12 

~~  Q  W 

O  O 

=  135  inch-tons. 


of 


DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS  67 

The  maximum  fibre  stress, 

My_  135x4 

T"=  ~72~~ 

=  7'5  tons  per  sq.  in. 
The  central  deflection, 


5     W/3 
84   ET 
5x9x120x120x120 


A       384   El 


384x13000x72 
=  0-216  ins. 

Example  2  (I.C.E.). — Suppose  that  three  beams  or  planks,  A, 
B,  and  C,  of  the  same  material,  are  laid  side  by  side  across  a  span 
/=100  ins.,  and  a  load  W  =  600  Ibs.  is  laid  across  them  at  the 
centre  of  the  span,  so  that  they  must  all  bend  together.  The 
beams  are  all  6  ins.  wide,  but  while  A  and  C  have  a  depth  of 
3  ins.,  the  depth  of  the  middle  beam  B  is  twice  as  great.  How 
much  of  the  weight  W  will  be  carried  by  each  of  the  three  beams, 
and  what  will  be  the  extreme  fibre  stress  in  each  ? 

Led  I  =  length  of  beams  in  inches ; 

E  =  modulus ; 

Ij  =  moment  of  inertia  of  6"  x  6"  beam  in  inch-units ; 

I2  =  moment  of  inertia  of  two  6"  X  3"  beams  in  inch-units ; 

A  =  deflection  of  beams  in  inches  ; 

Mj_  =  maximum  bending  moment  of  6"  x  6"  beam  in  inch-lbs. ; 
M9  =  maximum  bending  moment  of  two  6"  X  3"  beams  in  inch- 
lbs. ; 

y  —  distance  from  neutral  axis  to  extreme  edge  of  section ; 

/  =  extreme  fibre  stress  in  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

Suppose  the  two  6"  x  3"  beams  to  be  taken  as  one  12"  x  3" 
beam. 

The  load  being  placed  across  all  three  beams,  and  all  bending 
together,  the  deflection  will  be  the  same  in  each  case. 

Let  x  —  the  load  carried  by  the  6"  x  6"  beam. 

Then  W  —  x  —  the  load  carried  by  the  two  6"  x  3"  beams. 

Deflection    =    A    =       ^  ^  ,     =      7o~pr~j 

x  (w  -  x) 

or          -r-    =    *-rs — '- 


68  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

But         fi    =    *        =    6  =    108  inch-units 

and         I 


2 

x 


108 

108(600-.r) 
'T  27 

a-   =   480  Ibs. 
600  -x   =    120  Ibs. 
and     J  x  (600 -ar)    =    60  Ibs. 

Load  carried  by  6"  X  6"  beam  is  480  Ibs. 
Load  carried  by  each  6"  x  3"  beam  is  60  Ibs. 
Bending  moment  for  6"  X  6"  beam 

WL   =     480x100   =;   12000inch.lbs. 

4  4 

Bending  moment  for  6"  X  3"  beam  (each) 
WL        60  x  100 


^ 

Maximum  fibre  stress  for  6"  x  6"  beam 

12000x3 


and       f    = 


Ia  108 

=    333'S  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 


I,  27 


CHAPTEE    VI 

SHEAR  STRESS   IN   LOADED   BEAMS 

Distribution  of  Shear  Stress  in  Loaded  Beams 

IT  is  not  difficult  to  see  that  there  must  be  shear  stress  produced 
on  vertical  sections  of  horizontal  loaded  beams  by  the  shearing 
forces  which  tend  to  cause  sliding.  The  distribution  of  this  stress 
over  the  section  will  now  be  considered. 

If  there  is  shear  stress  at  any  point  on  a  vertical  section,  it 
has  been  shown  that  there  must  also  be  a  shear  stress  of  equal 
intensity  on  a  horizontal  plane  going  through  the"  same  point.  It 
is  this  horizontal  stress  that  is  first  determined,  and  the  shear 
stress  on  a  vertical  section  taken  as  being  equal. 


FIG.  49. 

The  simplest  illustration  of  the  existence  of  a  horizontal  shear 
stress  is  to  be  found  in  the  case  of  a  rectangular  timber  beam 
which  has  been  sawn  into  planks,  as  shown  in  Fig.  49.  On  these 
being  supported  at  the  ends,  it  is  seen  that  they  are  deflected 
downwards  by  their  own  weight  to  a  very  much  greater  extent 
than  would  be  the  case  with  the  original  solid  beam.  The  reason 
is  that  the  horizontal  layers  are  free  to  slide  upon  one  another, 
and  become  so  many  individual  beams.  In  the  original  beam  the 
tendency  to  slide  in  this  way  is  resisted  by  the  horizontal  shear 
stress  in  the  material. 

To  find  the  actual  intensity  of  the  shear  stress  fs  at  any  point 

(59 


70 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


whose  distance  from  the  neutral  axis  of  the  vertical  section  is  r, 

the  following  method  may  be  used : 

Eeferring  to  Fig.  50,  consider  two  vertical  sections  AA  and 

BB,  enclosing  a  slice  of  the  material  of  the  beam  in  question,  and 

whose  distance  apart  is  Sz. 
Next,  consider  the  equili- 
brium of  that  portion  of  the 
slice  which  lies  above  any 
horizontal  plane  LLP  distant 
r  from  the  neutral  axis.  This 
portion  is  acted  upon  by  hori- 
zontal forces  only,  and  is  in 
equilibrium.  Three  forces  act 
upon  it,  namely,  the  horizontal 
direct  stress  on  AL  =  P;  the 
contrary  horizontal  stress  on 
BLL  —  Pj_ ;  and  the  shear  force 
on  LLj  =  F.  Let  the  former 
S  of  these  direct  forces  be  the 
g  greater. 

Using  the   same  notation 
as  before, 


•c. 


p  =     - 


Also          P,    =    P/'  —  adx 
J  r  L  y 


where /^  and/g  are  the  maxi- 
mum direct  stresses  at  A  and 
B,  and  Y=fJ8z,  fs  being  the 
required  shear  stress,  j  the 
length,  and  Sz  the  width  of 
the  shear  surface.  But,  if  A 
is  the  vertical  area  above 
LL,  and  X  the  distance  of 
its  centre  of  gravity  from  the  neutral  axis, 


AX    =  \  x  a  d  . 


Therefore 


f 

P   =    —  AX 

y 


SHEAR  STRESS  IN  LOADED  BEAMS 


71 


and 


Also,  F  =  P  —  Pr  and,  in  the  limit 


y 
AX 


If  M  is  the  bending  moment  at  AA,  and  M  —  dM  the  bending 
moment  at  BB, 

M  =  /'--,  and  M-dM    =    /'  —  , 

A  y  1>  y 

from  which 


Therefore 


c?M 


l/s,/ 


FIG.  51. 


But  -^  is  the  shearing  force  S  at  the  section,  from  which 
it  follows  that  M 

f  _      SAX 

I  7 

which  is  the  shear  stress 
required. 

Example. — To  find  the 
distribution  of  shear  stress 
on  the  vertical  section  of  a 
rectangular  beam  of  width 
b  and  depth  d  =  2h,  when  subjected  to  a  total  shearing  force  S 
(Fig.  51). 

Using  the  value  found  above, 

,  SAX 

'  ~         lj 
A  is  the  area  of  the  section  above  LL  (Fig.  50),  =  &(A  —  ?•) 

X  is  the  distance  of  its  C.G.  from  the  neutral  axis,  =  — 


I  is  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  whole  section,  = 

j  is  constant  and  =  &. 


12 


72 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


Patting  these  values  in  the  above  equation,  the  required  stress, 


If  the  values  of  fs  are  found  for  a  number  of  different  values 
of  r,  and  the  results  plotted  from  a  vertical  base-line,  the  variation 
of  fs  will  be  shown  by  the  parabolic  curve  MOQ. 


FIG.  52. 

On  Fig.  52  are  shown  curves  of  shear  stress  for  a  beam  of  I 
section  and  for  a  tram-rail. 


Deflection  Due  to  Shear. 

The  way  in  which  the  deflection  caused  by  the  bending 
moment  on  a  beam  is  found  was  discussed  in  the  last  chapter. 
In  addition  to  the  deflection  so  found,  there  is  an  additional 


SHEAR  STRESS  IN  LOADED  BEAMS  73 

amount  to  be  added,  caused  by  the  effect  of  the  shearing  forces 
in  producing  shear  distortion. 

In  beams  where  the  ratio  y—  r  is  great,  the  deflection  due  to 

depth 

shear  is  so  small  as  to  be  negligible ;  but  in  short,  deep  beams  it 
becomes  of  more  importance. 

Professor  Perry  has  shown  that  for  a  rectangular  cantilever 
loaded  at  the  end  only,  the  total  deflection  at  the  end  is 

W73     _6_     Wl 
AI"  "3EI  +  T    Gbd 

and  of  the  two  parts  which  go  to  make  up  this  total,  that  on  the 
left  is  the  one  already  found ;  that  on  the  right  gives  the  deflection 
due  to  shear.  Here  G  is  the  shear  modulus. 

Continuous  Beams.  Tj 

Let  a  continuous  beam  rest  freely  on  supports  which  are  on 
the  same  level  at  A,  B,  C,  D  (Fig.  53).     At  the  first  and  last 


1 
h*  —  X  ~      ~*1 
i 

1 

i 

—  /-  -i-  —  r 

i 
i 

i         j'" 

\ 
\ 

-*""<! 

i 
i 

[ 

\ 

\               I 

4   . 

A 

B 

^ 

C 

FIG.  53. 

D 

Z 

support,  A  and  Z,  there  will  be  no  bending  moment  ;  at  each  of 
the  others  there  will  be  a  bending  moment  due  to  the  difference  in 
inclination  of  the  tangents  at  A  and  the  other  supports. 

Let  M^,  E^,  ZA)  and  MB,  E£,  ZB,  etc.,  be  the  respective  bending 
moments,  reactions,  and  angles  of  slope  at  A,  B,  etc. 

First,  let  the  beam  carry  uniform  loads  per  ft.  run,  wt  w't  w", 
etc.,  in  the  respective  spans  /,  I',  I". 

The  bending  moment  at  a  point  distant  x  from  A  is 


and 


from  which  R        M^  ~  MB  +  wl_  .„ 


74  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

« 

Therefore  wx2         ,       ,.     x     wlx 


-El* 

—     -L*l     j    o 


Whence,  on  integrating, 


M  .  —  M,,    r2 


when  a;  =  0,  -    =  ^.  so  that  C  =  El  z  A  ;  when  a;  =  /,  ~  =  zs 
doc  ctx 

Therefore 

^,.73  /  ?y./3 

El  Sy)  =  MAl  +  -6-  -  (M^  -  M£)  T  -  -j-  •  +  El  ZA 


Again,  integrating  (2), 


when  aj  =  0,  ,y  =  0,  and  when  x  =  l,  y  =  Q,  so  that  the  constant 
that  is 


or 


In  a  similar  manner,  taking  B  as  origin  and  considering  the 
span  BC  =  /',  the  following  result  is  obtained  :— 


/  V/'/2 

-T2 

/      wl*-  I  I      w/3 


M          +M    -.- 

^6  B  3       24 


Therefore 


SHEAR  STRESS  IN  LOADED  BEAMS  75 

From  which 

3  (i) 


This  last  is  the  equation  of  3  moments,  and  is  similar  for  each 
pair  of  spans.     That  is, 


M/'  +  2MI)(I"  +  1'")  +  M/"  =  (iii) 

and  so  on. 

There  are  five  unknown  quantities  in  the  above  three  equations 
(i),  (ii),  and  (iii).  It  generally  happens  that  the  beam  is  allowed 
to  rest  freely  on  the  supports  at  the  two  extreme  ends,  so  that 
M^  =  0  and  Mi(  =  0,  and  there  will  be  three  unknowns  to  be  found 
from  three  equations,  so  that  these  values  are  determinate. 


V/A  & 

ABC 

FIG.   54. 

Example  1.— Case  of  uniform  load  on  a  continuous  beam  rest- 
ing on  three  supports,  separated  by  two  equal  spans  (Fig.  54). 

Here,  using  equation  (i),  M^  /+  2MB  (/+/')  +  MC/'  = 

so  that 

1]   ~"     ~8 
and 

wl2     ?/;/2 


=    -£-  wl=R     by  reason  of  symmetry. 


Total  load  =  2wl,  so  that 


76  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

calling  the  total  load 

3 
and 


This  is  the  same  result  as  was  previously  obtained  in  another 
way.  ' 

Example  2. — Case  of  uniform  load  in  a  continuous  beam  rest- 
ing on  four  supports,  separated  by  three  equal  spans  (Fig.  55). 


^  A  A 

A  B  C  D 

FIG.  55. 

Using  equations  (i),  (ii),  and  (iii)  — 

M^  and  M^  =  0,  w  =  w'  =  w",  and  also  M£  =  Mc,  l  =  l'=  I", 

so  that  it  is  only  necessary  to  write  (i)  as 


which  becomes 


or 


and 

R   _  M A  ~  MB     wl 

__icl_     wl  _  2 
and  from  symmetry 


SHEAR  STRESS  IN  LOADED  BEAMS 

The  total  load  on  the  beam  is  3wl,  so  that 


or  if  the  total  load  3wl  is  called  W, 


and 


CHAPTER    VII 


RELATION  BETWEEN  LOAD  AND  STRESS  IN  A  PRISMATIC  BAR 

REFERRING  to  the  accompanying  figure  (Fig.  56),  the  upper  view 
represents  the  elevation  of  a  prismatic  bar  or  piece  of  material, 
/,  m,  o,  p,  whose  cross-section  on  a  plane  at  right  angles  to  the  axis 

is  shown  in  the  lower  view.  The  geo- 
metric axis  of  the  bar  will  pass  through 
the  centre  of  gravity  of  this  section.  Let 
a  load  P  act  either  along  or  parallel  to 
this  axis,  as  shown  by  the  dotted  line. 
This  may  be  either  a  compressive  or  a 
tensile  load.  Suppose  for  the  present 

that  it  is  a  load  in  compression.     If  it 

acts  along  the  axis  of  the  piece,  it  will 
result  in  a  uniform  compressive  stress 
which  is  the  same  at  all  points  of 
the  section.  Its  magnitude  will  be 

p 

fd  =  --,  where  A  is  the  area  in  question. 
A. 

In  most  cases  of  loading  of  this  kind, 
uniformity  of  stress  is  aimed  at  but  is 
rarely  attained.  If  the  line  of  the  load 
P  is  shifted  ever  so  little  away  from  the 
geometric  axis  of  the  prisrn,  the  stress 
at  once  becomes  a  variable  one,  with  a 
maximum  value  greater  and  a  mini- 
FIG  56  mum  less  than  fd.  The  farther  the 

load  is  moved  away  from  the  axis,  the 

greater  becomes  the  difference  between  the  mean  and  the  extreme 
stresses.  The  precise  relation  which  exists  between  the  load  and 
the  extreme  and  mean  stresses  for  any  given  section,  when  the  line 

78 


LOAD  AND  STRESS  IN  A  PRISMATIC  BAR  79 

of  loading  is  so  moved  away  from  the  geometric  axis,  is  given  in 
what  immediately  follows. 

Again  referring  to  Fig.  56,  the  load  P  is  supposed  no  longer  to 
act  at  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  area  O,  but  its  line  of  action, 
still  parallel  to  the  axis,  has  been  moved  away  from  this  point,  and 
now  passes  through  some  new  point,  Q,  at  a  distance  a  from  0 
measured  along  FG,  one  of  the  principal  axes  of  the  figure.  The 
point  Q  may  or  may  not  lie  in  this  line,  but  for  the  present  it  is  to 
be  supposed  that  it  does. 

It  has  been  shown  that  if  M  is  the  bending  moment  on  a 

section  of  a  prism,  M  = ,  where  I  is  the  moment  of  inertia  of 

u 

the  area  about  the  neutral  axis  CD.  In  the  present  case  the  load 
P  is  one  of  compression,  and,  in  acting  as  it  does  at  some  distance 
from  the  centroid  of  the  area,  gives  rise  to  the  bending  moment  M. 
This  tends  to  bend  the  piece  in  the  direction  indicated  by  the 
arrows,  causing  compression  of  the  material  at  F  and  tension  at  G. 
Both  stresses  have  a  maximum  value  at  these  points,  and  diminish 
uniformly  as  they  approach  the  neutral  axis.  If  the  section  is 
symmetrical  about  the  neutral  axis  and  the  elastic  properties  are 
the  same  in  compression  as  in  tension,  it  has  been  shown  that  the 

TV  *" 

value  of  the  maximum  stress,  /6  =  — ^—,  will  be  the  same  at  F  as 
at  G.  The  precise  value  of  the  bending  moment  will  in  the 
present  case  be  M  =  Pa,  and  therefore  fb  =  - — ^—.  This  gives  the 

value  of  the  maximum  tensile  and  compressive  stresses  due  to  the 
bending  action  caused  by  the  load  in  acting  away  from  the  centroid 
of  the  area, 

It  has  just  been  shown  that  the  uniform  stress  is  the  load 

p 

divided  by  the  area  of  the  section,  or/d=-r-. 

.A. 

The  actual  combined  stress  at  either  edge,  F  or  G,  will  be  the 
algebraic  sum  of  the  uniform  and  bending  stresses. 

Thus,  at  F,  which  is  on  the  same  side  of  the  neutral  axis  as 
the  point  where  the  load  acts,  the  two  stresses  will  have  the  same 
sign.  In  the  present  instance  this  is  one  of  compression.  If  the 
uniform  stress  fd  be  given  the  plus  sign,  then  the  stress  due  to 

bending,  f  My 

h  =     ±  — 


80 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


according  as  it  is  on  the  same  or  the  opposite  side  of  the  neutral 
axis  as  the  load  P.     At  any  point  in  the  section  there  will  be  a  com- 
bined stress,  consisting  on  the  one  part  of  the  uniform  stress  and 
on  the  other  of  the  stress  due  to  the  bending. 
At  F,  the  total  or  effective  stress  will  be 


,.  f       f 

«/€     =   Jd^Jb    =     ~A" 


and  at  G, 


Je 


My 
1 

My 


As  the  moment  of  inertia  I  =  A  .  kz  where,  as  before,  A  is  the 
area  and  k  is  the  radius  of  gyration  about  CD,  the  above  expres- 
sion may  for  convenience  be  written 

f   -     J!.  +  J?L 

'  •   ~  '        ± 


d  -  4-  — 


A 


The  above  expression  gives  a  relation  between  the  dimensions 
of  the  section  of  the  piece  of  material  under  stress,  the  magnitude 

of  the  load,  the  distance  of  the  line 
I  of  action  of  the  load  from  the  centre 

! 

of  gravity,  and  the  maximum  and 
minimum  stresses  resulting.  It  is 
applicable  to  sections  of  any  form, 
so  long  as  the  moments  of  inertia  can 
be  found.  In  the  case  of  the  more 
usual  sections,  which  consist  wholly 
of,  or  are  made  up  of  regular  figures, 
such  as  rectangles  and  circles,  the 
values  of  the  radius  of  gyration  can 
readily  be  found  by  the  usual  mathe- 

matical methods  ;  where  the  section  has  a  more  complicated  form 

the  modulus  must  be  found  by  the  graphical  method,  and  from  it 

the  radius  of  gyration  determined. 

Particular    Cases.  —  One   or   two   particular   cases   will   now 

be  considered. 

Circle.  —  In  Fig.  57  is  shown  a  circular  section  of  radius  r  and 

diameter  d.     In  this  case  the  distance  from  the  neutral  axis  or 


FIG.  57. 


LOAD  AND  STRESS  IN  A  PRISMATIC  BAR 


81 


T'  °r  16 


centre  of  gravity  to  the  edge  of  the  section  is  the  radius  of  the 
circle,  and  the  expression  giving  the  maximum  stress  is 

P 


and  as  in  the  circle 
the  above  becomes 


By  again  subtracting  the  uniform  stress  resulting  from  the 
load  acting  down  the  geometrical  axis  of  the  bar  from  the 
maximum  stress  obtained  as  above,  the  stress  due  to  bending 
alone,  which  may  be  called  the  excess  caused  by  the  eccentric 
loading,  is  obtained.  That  is, 

T? 
Excess 


s     f  ,  „ 

=/.-/,-  '-  '        =.f, 


$ 
which  reduces  to  T—  —  ;  or,  when  put  in  the  form  of  a  percentage 

-A.      T 

by  which  the  maximum  exceeds  the  uniform  or  mean,  it  becomes 

4^100          SalOO       , 

-    or   --  -  —  ,  where  d  is  the  diameter  of  the  circle. 
T  a 

In  the  following  table  are  given  values  of  this  percentage  for 
different  degrees  of  eccentricity,  varying  from  0  to  Q'SQd  ;  that  is 
to  say,  at  various  points  from  the  centre  to  the  circumference 
of  the  circle. 

TABLE  OF   PERCENTAGE  EXCESS  OF  MAXIMUM  OVER  UNIFORM  OR  MEAN 
STRESS  IN  A  CIRCULAR  SECTION. 


a 

t 

Remarks. 

0 

0 

At  centre 

0-05d 

40  per  cent. 

O'Wd 

80 

0-20d 

160 

0-30d 

240 

0-±0d 

320     .    „ 

0-50rf 

400 

At  circumference 

82 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


Thus,  it  will  be  seen  that  by  moving  the  line  of  action  of  the 
load  no  more  than  one-tenth  of  the  diameter  of  the  circle  away 
from  its  centre,  the  stress  at  the  circumference  is  about 


!*-      -h  -       - 


b  - 

i 


FIG.  58. 


doubled,   and    by  taking   it   to   the   circumference   the  stress  is 
magnified  fivefold. 

Rectangle. — In   the   case   of   a   rectangular    section  (Fig.    58) 
similar  results  are  found.     Here,  as  before, 


100 


6a 


100 


where  a  has  the  same  meaning  as  before,  and  h  is  the   depth 
of    the   section   measured   at   right  angles  to  the   neutral   axis. 


TABLE  OF  PERCENTAGE  EXCESS  OF  MAXIMUM  OVER  UNIFORM   OR   MEAN 
STRESS  IN  A  RECTANGULAR  SECTION. 


a 

e 

Remarks. 

0 

0 

At  centre 

0-05A 

30  per  cent. 

0-10A 

60         „ 

0-20/* 

120         „ 

0-30A 

180 

040A 

240 

0-50A 

300 

At  edge 

LOAD  AND  STRESS  IN  A  PRISMATIC  BAR 


83 


By  comparing  the  figures  in  these  two  tables  it  will  at  once  be 
seen  that  the  increase  is  more  marked  in  the  case  of  the  circle 
than  in  the  rectangle. 


d  =  JO 


_L 


FIG.  59. 
Example  of  G-irder  Section  (Fig.  59) : — 

—  *  -{"•«:!:' 


i   =     4J 


13 J  sq.  ins. 


y  =  5  ins. 


6x(10y     5ix(8i)3 
12  12 


=  16-5 


e  =  per  cent,  excess  =  -M-  x  100 
k2 


A  nj  1  x5  x  100 

when  «  =  0-ld,  e  =  =    30  per  cent. 

1  0*0 

2x5  x  100 
„      a  =  0-2d,  e  =  --  =    60 


3x5  x  100 
„      a  =  0-3d,  e  =  --  -    90 


A  .  ,  4x  5  x  100 

„      a  =0-4d,  ^  =          -  =120 


5x  5  x  100 
e  =  --  =150 


84 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


TABLE  OF  PERCENTAGE  EXCESS  OF  MAXIMUM   OVER  UNIFORM   OR   MEAN 
STRESS  IN  THE  I  SECTION  SHOWN  ON  FIG.  59. 


a 

e 

Remarks. 

0 

0 

At  centre 

0-lOd 

30  per  cent. 

0-20d 

60        „ 

0-3Qd 

90        „    . 

0-40d 

120 

0-50d 

150 

At  edge 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  more  the  material  is  spread  away  from 
the  centre  the  smaller  is  the  effect  produced  by  moving  the  load- 
line  any  given  distance  from  the  neutral  axis. 

Position  of  the  load  P  which  will  give  a  zero  stress  at  one  edye  of 
the  section. 

The  minimum  stress  is 


Put  this  equal  to  zero 


from  which  a  =  — ,  which  means  that  if  P  acts  along  a  line  which 

k* 

passes  through  the  section  at  a  distance  —  from  its  centre  of 

gravity  measured  at  right  angles  to  the  neutral  axis,  the  stress 
due  to  bending  will  just  neutralise  the  direct  stress  at  the  edge  of 
the  section  on  the  side  farthest  away  from  the  load. 

For  a  circle,  where  &2  =  -       and  y  =  - 


That  is  to  say,  P  must  act  within  the  middle  quarter  of  the 
diameter  in  order  that  the  stress  at  any  part  of  the  section  may 
not  change  signs,  or,  in  other  words,  the  load-line  in  cutting  any 


LOAD  AND  STRESS  IN  A  PRISMATIC  BAR 


85 


section  must  not  be  outside  a  circle  which  is  concentric  with  that 
forming  the  outer  boundary  and  whose  diameter  is  =  -^-  • 
In  the  case  of  a  rectangle  of  height  h  and  width  I, 


and 
so  that 


&2  = 

y  = 

a    = 


T 


// 


This  means  that  the  load-line  must  be  kept  within  the  middle 
third  of  the  depth,  in  order  that  the  stress  may  be  of  the  same 
kind  at  all  parts  of 

~T 


i- 


A 

_L 


FIG.  60. 


the  section. 

The  last  result  be- 
comes of  great  im- 
portance in  such  cases 
as  masonry  arches  and 
walls,  where  it  is  never 
permissible  to  put  any 
part  of  the  material 
under  tensile  stress. 
If  the  load-line  gets 
outside  the  middle  third  of  the  section,  the  intended  compressive 
stress  becomes  a  tension  stress  at  one  edge. 

In  the  I  section  above, 

k2  =    16'5  ins. 
y    =    5  ins. 

and  #>          16-5'  v. 

a    =  =    -        •    =    3'3    ins. 

y          ° 

The  depth  is  10  ins.,  so  that  a  can  be  written  as  a=   e^     X  3'3, 

or  the  load-line  must  be  kept  within  the  middle  two-thirds  of  the 
depth  in  the  direction  of  the  centre  line  of  the  web. 

The  dotted  lines  in  Figs.  57,  58,  59,  indicate  the  boundaries 
within  which  the  load-line  must  act  in  order  to  ensure  that  the 
stress  is  all  tension  or  all  compression. 

The  diagram  on  Fig.  60  shows  how  the  direct  stress  and  the 
bending  stress  combine  to  produce  the  resultant  stress.  This  is 
for  the  case  shown  on  Fig.  64. 


86 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


Instances  of  Unequal  Stresses  due  to  Eccentric  Loading. 

The  only  way  to  determine  the  stress  occurring  in  any 
portion  of  material  under  stress  is  to  measure  the  compression 
or  extension  of  a  given  length  on  the  surface  of  the  material. 
It  is  well  known  that  so  long  as  the  stresses  in  the  material  are 
not  carried  beyond  the  elastic  limit,  they  are  proportional  to  the 
strains  or  deformations ;  so  that  if,  when  the  material  is  in  this 
condition,  the  extensions  or  compressions  can  be  measured  on 
the  surface  of  the  material  at  given  points,  the  deformations  so 
found  will  be  measures  of  the  stresses  at  these  points. 


M 


X 


FIG.  61. 

Method  of  Measuring  the  Strains  (Extensions  or 
Compressions). 

For  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  the  amount  of  compression  or 
extension  of  a  structural  part  or  specially  prepared  specimen, 
the  writer  has  made  use  of  the  Martens  mirror  apparatus,  the 
principle  of  whose  working  is  indicated  in  the  sketch  on  Fig.  61. 

Here  the  material  forms  part  of  a  bar  in  tension,  XY,  and  it  is 
desired  to  measure  the  extension  of  the  material  on  the  right- 
hand  and  left-hand  surfaces  respectively.  Take  the  right-hand 
side.  Here  a  light  metal  bar  B  is  held  against  the  surface  of  the 


LOAD  AND  STRESS  IN  A  PRISMATIC  BAR  87 

material.  The  lower  end  of  this  bar  has  a  sharp  edge  or  point, 
which  penetrates  the  surface  to  a  very  small  extent  and  prevents 
the  measuring  bar  B  from  slipping.  At  the  upper  end  is  a  groove 
in  which  rests  one  side  of  a  rocking  prism,  whose  other  edge 
rests  against  the  surface  of  XY.  Before  loading  the  prism  lies 
in  a  horizontal  position,  but  when  a  tension  load  is  applied  the 
edge  of  the  prism  resting  against  the  surface  of  the  material 
is  raised  as  the  bar  is  extended,  while  the  edge  against  B  remains 
stationary  relatively  to  the  bar;  in  this  way  the  prism  is  tilted 
slightly. 

The  prism  carries  a  mirror,  M,  as  indicated  in  the  sketch.  The 
observer,  on  looking  through  a  telescope  at  A,  sees  reflected  in 
the  mirror  a  view  of  a  graduated  scale  Bp  and  a  hair-line  in 
the  diaphragm  of  the  telescope  appears  to  lie  across  the  scale. 
The  more  the  material  of  the  bar  stretches,  the  further  the  prism 
is  tilted  and  a  different  part  of  the  scale  brought  into  view. 
The  distances  and  graduations  of  the  scale  are  so  proportioned 
that  the  apparent  movement  of  the  hair-line  across  the  scale  pro- 
vides a  definite  measure  of  the  amount  of  stretch  of  the  material. 

It  will  be  seen  that  in  the  sketch  there  are  two  arrangements 
of  this  kind,  one  on  each  face  of  the  bar.  The  apparatus  can  be 
used  equally  well  for  compression  as  for  tension. 

Example  1.  —  A  masonry  pier,  having  the  section  already 
given  on  Eig.  25,  carries  a  load  whose  line  of  action  passes 
through  a  point  1  ft.  6  ins.  from  the  wide  edge.  To  find  the  maxi- 
mum load  to  give  a  compressive  stress  which  does  not  exceed  12 
tons  per  sq.  ft.  : 

The  moment  of  inertia,  I,  has  already  been  found,  and  =  43*6 
foot-units. 

Let  W  =  load  in  tons, 

Area  of  pier  =  (18  +  6)  =  24  sq.  ft. 

W 

Uniform  compressive  stress  =  ^  tons  per  sq.  ft.  =  0'0417  W. 

Compressive  stress  at  X  due  to  bending  moment 


g   =    2-875',  and  a   =    3-500-2-875 

=   0-625 

M    =  =    (W  x  0-625)  Ib.-ft. 
y    =    (1-5  +  0-625)  =  2-125  ft. 


88 
Therefore 


= 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 
W  x  0-625  x  2-125 


-.     12    =    0-0305  W  +  0-0417  W 
12 


W   = 


0-0722 


-  166  tons. 


Example  2. — On  Fig.  62  is  shown  a  sketch  which  represents 
a    mild    steel    test -piece    when    being 
P  subjected    to    a    compressive    load    be- 

tween the  two  platens  T  T  of  a  testing 
machine. 

The  thick  lines  M  M  represent  the 
bars  B  B  of  the  Martens  mirror  appar- 
atus on  Fig.  61.  On  Fig.  63  are  shown 
curves  of  loads  and  compressions  for  two 
different  conditions  of  loading. 

Those  marked  (a)  give  the  loads 
and  the  corresponding  compressions 
when  the  flat  ends  of  the  bar  rest 
against  the  platens  of  the  machine  on 
the  assumption  that  the  line  of  load 
will  coincide  with  the  axis  of  the  bar 
and  consequently  the  stress  will  be  the 
same  at  all  points.  That  this  assump- 
tion is  not  borne  out  by  the  observations 
taken  during  the  experiment  is  shown 
by  the  curves.  The  eccentricity  of  the 
load-line,  which  gives  rise  to  this  in- 
equality of  stress,  is  probably  due  to  the 
platens  of  the  machine  not  being  quite 
parallel. 

The  other  pair  of  curves  represents  the  result  of  applying 
the  load,  not  through  the  flat  ends  of  the  bar,  but  through  a  pair 
of  steel  balls  placed  in  the  centres  of  the  ends,  and  seem  to  indi- 
cate that  the  load-line  is  now  very  near  the  axis.  The  two 
curves  almost  coincide,  showing  that  the  stress  is  practically 
uniform. 

The  figures  from  which  the  above  curves  were  plotted  were 
obtained  from  actual  experiment. 


FIG.  62. 


LOAD  AND  STRESS  IN  A  PRISMATIC  BAR 


89 


Example  3  (Fig.  64). — This  is  an  experiment  not  unlike  the 
last.  Here  are  two  cubical  blocks  of  concrete,  one  being  bedded 
upon  the  other  through  a  joint  of  cement  mortar.  The  Martens 
mirrors  were  used  as  before. 

First  the  load  was  placed  at  P  P  in  the  centre,  and  the  curves 
(a)  (a)  (Fig.  65)  obtained.  These  almost  coincide,  indicating 
uniformity  of  stress. 

The  load  was  then  allowed  to  act  at  Px  P1;  just  on  the  edge 
of  the  middle  third  of  the  section.  It  has  been  shown  that  with 

COMPRESSIONS. 


tf? 


J 


FIG.  63. 


this  arrangement  of  loading  the  compressive  stress  is  a  maximum 
at  the  right-hand  edge  and  zero  on  the  left-hand  edge.  This 
is  practically  the  case  in  the  present  experiment,  as  is  shown  by 
the  curves  I  and  &.  That  the  result  is  not  quite  what  it  should 
be  is  caused  by  the  difficulty  in  applying  the  load  precisely  at  the 
edge  of  the  middle  third. 

Example  4. — The  two  curves  on  Fig.  66  were  obtained  from  an 
experiment  similar  to  the  last.  The  sample  of  material  was  in 
this  case  a  brickwork  pier  18  ins.  square  and  36  ins.  high  (see 
Fig.  97).  The  load  was  applied  through  a  very  carefully  prepared  bed 


90 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


P    Pf 


I" 


P 
FIG.  64. 


COMPRESSIONS. 


FIG.  65. 


LOAD  AND  STRESS  IN  A  PRISMATIC  BAR 


91 


of  neat  cement  mortar  by  first  setting  the  pillar  on  the  lower  platen, 
then  putting  a  layer  of  soft  cement  on  the  top,  bringing  down 
the  top  platen  with  a  little  pressure,  and  leaving  it  so  until  the 
mortar  had  set.  Between  the  mortar  and  the  platen  was  a  thin 


COMPRESSIONS. 


FIG. 


layer  of  cardboard.  After  this  process  it  would  naturally  be 
thought  that  the  stress  would  be  perfectly  uniform.  The  curves 
indicate  that  this  is  far  from  being  the  case,  and  shows  how 
difficult  it  is  to  obtain  uniformity  under  these  conditions. 


CHAPTEE    VIII 


PILLARS,  STRUTS,  OR  COLUMNS 

IN  the  case  of  a  short  prism  (Fig.  67a),  whose  length  is  /,  smallest 
diameter  d,  and  area  of  cross-section  A,  the  crushing  load  which 
causes  failure  is 

P-/A     or     *   _/ 


where  /  is  the  crushing  stress  for  the  material  in  question.     For 
this  to  hold  good,  the  ratio  -y  must  not  be  more  than  about  3  to  1. 

Cb 

Where  the  ratio  becomes  much  larger  than  this,  P  is  less  than  /A, 

p 
or  -r-  is  less  than  /. 

In  this  case  the  structural  part  is  spoken  of  as  a  pillar,  strut, 
or  long  column. 

In  a  short  column  failure  takes  place  by  simple  crushing,  and 
in  a  long  column  partly  by  crushing  and  partly  by  bending.  The 

greater  the  ratio  —r  the  more  is  the  strength  dependent  on  the 
ct 

effect  of  the  length,  until  a  point  is  reached,  where  -=-  is  greater 

K 

than  about  150,  at  which  the  failure  is  practically  due  to  bending 
alone  and  simple  crushing  is  negligible,     k  =  radius  of  gyration. 

p 

For  the  first  of  the  three  cases  —  =  /. 

.A. 

For  the  third  case  the  following  formula,  due  to  Euler,  is  to  be 

92 


PILLARS,  STRUTS,  OR  COLUMNS 


93 


used.     Euler's  Formula  for  very  long  columns  (Fig.  67c),  whose 
ends  are  perfectly  free,  is 

P  21?  F 

A    ::    **V 

where  P,  /,  and  A  have  the  same  meanings  as  before, 

E  is  the  direct  elastic  modulus, 
and      k  is  the  least  radius  of  gyration  of  the  cross-section. 

For  the  second  case  (Fig.  676),  which  is  the  one  most  commonly 


FIG.  67. 


met  with  in  practice,  various  formulas  have  been  devised.  It  is 
apparent  that  the  longer  the  column  relatively  to  its  diameter,  the 
more  easily  will  it  collapse  under  a  given  load,  so  that  a  formula 

P  P 

must  be  used  where,  instead  of  having  -A-=/,  -r-  must  be  less 

A.  A 

than  /,  the   diminution   becoming  greater  as  I  increases.     The 


94 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


formulas  in  use,  of  which  the  three  best  known  are  given  below, 
are  all  more  or  less  empirical. 

Gordon's    Formula  was   based   by   Professor    Gordon   on   the 
results  of  Hodgkinson's  long  series  of  experiments.     It  is 

L       / 

A  /2 


Here  it  will  be  seen  that  /  is  diminished  by  increasing  its  denomi- 
nator, which  is  made  to  depend  on  the  square  of  the  ratio  -j-  and 

upon  an  empirical  constant  c.  This  constant  varies  with  both  the 
form  of  the  section  and  the  material,  with  the  result  that  a  large 
number  of  constants  must  be  known  to  fit  all  cases  that  may  arise. 
The  constants  originally  given  for  use  in  this  formula  hardly  apply 
to  the  materials  and  forms  of  section  now  in  use,  and  it  is  not 
necessary  to  give  them  here. 

Rankine's  Modification  of  Gordon's  Formula  is  similar  in  general 
form,  being 

P  / 

A"  /a 


In  this  case  the  empirical  constant  a  varies  only  with  the 
material,  the  difference  in-  shape  being  accounted  for  by  the 
change  in  the  radius  of  gyration  Jc.  This  is  more  satisfactory 
than  Gordon's,  as  fewer  constants  are  required 

The  following  constants  are  given  by  several  authorities  for 
use  in  Kankine's  formula  :  — 


Material. 

/Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

a 

Wrought  iron 

36,000 

inrVo 

Mild  steel  . 

48,000 

TACTS' 

Hard  steel  . 

70,000 

i 

53TR7 

Cast  iron     . 

80,000 

TFW 

In  this  formula,  /  is  somewhat  higher  than  the   Yield  Point 
Stress    in    compression   for    the    first    three,   which    are   ductile 


PILLARS,  STRUTS,  OR  COLUMNS 


95 


materials,  and  is  the  Crushing  Stress  for  cast  iron.  As  the  load 
on  a  column  increases,  there  is  a  small  deflection  to  one  side  or  the 
other;  causing  a  maximum  compressive  stress  on  the  concave  side. 
When  this  stress  passes  the  yield  stress  of  the  material,  the  deflec- 
tion increases  rapidly,  and  buckling  follows. 

The  constants  a,  given  here,  all  refer  to  pillars  in  which  the 
ends  are  free  to  turn,  either  by  being  hinged  or  having  rounded 
ends.  The  length  I  is  the  distance  between  the  centres  about 
which  the  ends  can  turn. 

Where  the  column  is  rigidly  fixed  at  both  ends,  the  proper 

constant  is  ~ ;  where  it  is  fixed  at  one  end  and  free  at  the  other, 

4 
the  constant  is  --a. 


FIG. 


Fig.  68  shows  the  effect  of  fixing  one  or  both  ends.  Whatever 
method  of  fixing  is  employed,  the  effect  must  be  to  keep  the  axis 
of  the  unloaded  column  at  the  fixed  end  in  the  line  of  action  of 
the  load. 

A  more  recent  and  more  workable  formula  is  that  of  Professor 
Johnson  of  Wisconsin,  who  utilised  the  results  of  a  large  number 
of  destruction  tests  of  columns  made  by  Considere  and  Tetmajer. 


96 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


On  Fig.   69   are   plotted   three   curves  showing  the   relation 

p 

between   the   buckling  stress  -r-  for  columns  having  different 

.A. 

I  P 

values  of  -=-.     One  shows  the  values  of  —r-  as  given  by  Euler's 

formula,  which  for  columns  of  ordinary  lengths  is  seen  to  be  quite 
inapplicable.  The  second  is  that  of  Kankine,  which  gives  much 
more  reasonable  results.  Johnson  plotted  the  results  of  Consi- 
dere's  and  Tetmajer's  tests  in  a  similar  manner,  and  found  that  the 

parts  of  the  curves  between  the  line  of  zero  -j-  and  the  point  of 

rC 

contact  with  the  Euler  curve  are  approximately  parabolas  whose 
equations  are  of  the  form 


-i-  =    f'~  B  —  where   B  =   — L 
A        <y  k*  4?r2E 


Here  /  is  diminished  as  I  increases,  not  by  an  increasing  divisor, 
but  by  taking  away  a  larger  quantity. 


Jbs  per 


60,000 


40.000 


2O         4O         60         80        100        120        I&O        160        180      ZOO 


20.000 


The  symbol  /  denotes  the  compression  yield  point  for  the 
ductile  materials  and  the  ultimate  crushing  stress  for  brittle 
materials. 


PILLARS,  STRUTS,  OR  COLUMNS 


97 


—  then  denotes  the  stress  on  the  cross-section  of  the  column 
A 

which  will  cause  it  to  fail  by  buckling  or  fracturing,  according 

p 

to  the  material.     To  get  the  safe  stress,  -r-  must  be  divided  bv 

A. 

a  factor  of  safety. 

It  must  also  be  noted  that  k  is  the  least  radius  of  gyration 
of  the  section. 

The  values  given  by  Johnson  for  the  constants  B  and  / 
are: — 

P  /2 

TABLE  OF  VALUES  OF  B  AND  f  IN  FORMULA  —  =  f  —  B  -^ 


Material. 

Condition  of  Ends. 

-r-  not  greater 
than 

fibs. 
per  sq.  in. 

B. 

Wrought  Ironj 

Pin  (hinged) 
Flat 

170 
210 

34,000 
34,000 

0-67 
0-43 

Mild  Steel       .  | 

Pin  (hinged) 
Flat 

150 
190 

42,000 
42,000 

0-97 
0-62 

Cast  Iron         .  \ 

Rounded 
Flat 

70 
120 

60,000 
60,000 

6-25 
2-25 

It  is  necessary  to  point  out  that  the  values  of  /  which  are 
given  above  are  those  chosen  by  Johnson,  as  average  values  arising 
from  his  own  experience.  Where  accuracy  is  desired,  it  will  be 
necessary  to  find  the  value  of  /  directly  from  compression  tests  of 
samples  of  the  material  in  question,  and  calculate  B  accordingly. 

The  following  example  will  serve  to  illustrate  the  use  of 
Johnson's  formula: — 

Steel  pillar  of  the  section  shown  on  Fig.  70,  loaded  through 
rollers  whose  centres  are  49J  inches  apart. 

Depth  =  6  ins. 
Width  of  flange  =  3  ins. 
Thickness  of  flange  =  0*45  in. 
of  web  =  0'39  in. 


98  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

From  the  dimensions  it  is  found  that 

A  =  4'66  sq.  ins. 
I  -  2-05. 

&2  =  4  =  0-440. 

A. 

I  =  49-25  ins. 
f  =  40,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  by  experiment. 


Then, 


and 


B  " 


FIG.  70. 


:-33J 


P  =  4-66(40,000  -  1-33^ 
=  68  tons  nearly. 

The  actual  collapsing  load  of  this  was  found  by  experiment  to 
be  69  tons. 


OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY 

Of 


/ 


CHAPTEE    IX 


TORSION  AND  SPRINGS 


BY  torsion  is  meant  the  effect  produced  by  the  action  of  a  pair  of 
equal  and  opposite  couples  at  the  ends  of  a  prism  or  shaft  acting 
in  planes  at  right  angles  to  its  axis.  The  kind  of  stress  caused  by 
torsion  most  commonly  occurs  in  rotating  shafts  used  for  trans- 
mitting power. 

Elastic  Circular  Shaft. — In  Fig.  71  is  shown  a  view  of  a 
short  length,  I,  of  a  solid  circular  shaft,  whose  ends  consist  of  two 


FIG.  71. 

circles  having  centres  0  and  Q  at  the  ends  of  the  axis  OQ.  These 
circular  planes  are  perpendicular  to  the  axis. 

This  forms  a  short  length  taken  out  of  a  shaft  such  as  that 
shown  on  Fig.  72. 

Suppose  a  line  AB  parallel  to  the  axis  to  be  drawn  on  the 
surface  of  the  shaft  before  any  force  is  applied  to  it. 

The  pair  of  equal  and  opposite  couples  or  twisting  moments, 
T  T,  are  now  allowed  to  act  on  the  shaft.  The  effect  will  be 
to  rotate  the  ends  relatively  to  one  another,  in  the  directions 


100  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

indicated  by  the  arrows.  If  A  be  taken  as  stationary,  the  effect 
of  the  twisting  will  be  to  move  the  point  B  to  C,  and  the  line  AB 
into  a  new  position  AC,  making  an  angle  /3  with  AB.  This  line 
AC  will  form  part  of  a  spiral. 

The  movement  of  B  to  C  will  mean  that  the  radius  QB  =  r 
takes  up  a  new  position  QC  after  turning  through  an  angle 
BQC  =  0.  For  the  purposes  of  the  following  proof  the  material  is 
assumed  to  be  elastic.  This  being  the  case,  it  is  reasonable  to 
assume  that  the  radius  QB,  which  is  a  straight  line,  remains 


straight  when  twisting  takes  place.  If  E  is  any  point  in  this 
radius  intermediate  between  B  and  Q,  where  QE  =  #,  E  will  move 
to  F  when  B  moves  to  C,  and 


EF         x_ 
BC   =      r 


From  this  it  follows  that  a  line  DE,  which  is  parallel  to  the 
axis  before  the  twist  is  applied,  will  assume  a  new  position  DF, 
the  angle  EDF  being  called  /3r 

Now,  BC  EF          EF 


_ 

or 


For  stresses  within  the  elastic  limit,  the  angles  of  distortion 
are  relatively  small,  and  the  above  may  be  written 

A 

V       T 

This  angular  distortion  is  due  to  the  shear  stress  produced  by 
the  twisting  moment  and  acting  circumferentially  about  Q.     It 


TORSION  AND  SPRINGS 


101 


has  previously  been  shown  that  the  angle  of  distortion  is  pro- 
portional to  the  shear  stress  producing  it.  Or,  if  fs  is  the  shear 
stress  at  BC,  on  the  surface  of  the  shaft,  and  s  is  the  shear  stress 
at  any  other  surface  EF,  then 


or,  in  other  words,  the  shear  stress  in  a  circular  shaft  subjected  to 
torsion   has   a   maximum  value  at  the 
surface  of  the  shaft,  and  at  any  other 
radius  x  is  proportional  to  that  radius. 

Next,  to  find  the  torsional  resisting 
moment.  On  Fig.  73  the  circle  repre- 
sents the  section  of  the  shaft  having  a 
diameter  d  and  radius  r.  Let  this 
section  be  divided  up  into  a  number  of 
elemental  rings  of  •  radius  =  x,  and 
width  =  Sx.  The  area  of  one  such  ring 
=  27rxSx.  The  circumferential  force 
on  the  ring  =  s  (2irxSx) 

f, 


as 


U j  — J 


Also,  the  moment  of  this  force  about  the  centre  is 

-*, 


27T 

- 


This  is  the  torsional  resisting  moment  of  one  of  the  elemental 
rings,  and  the  total  resisting  moment  will  be 


[r  TT 

xzdx    =    —  f  r3 

Jo  2  Js 


or 


This  is  equal  and  opposite  to  the  external  twisting  moment  T, 


>  where  d  = 


102  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

For  a  hollow  shaft  (Fig.  74)  having  inner  and  outer  diameters 
respectively  =  d2  and  dv  and  radii  r2  and  rp 

T  T  =  ^ 


l'  =  |-/s 

I 

FIG.  74.  16^s 

The  expressions 

7T  7T       ,.         7T      /  A  -        7T 

—  r4.    —  a4,    —  1  r,4  —  r0   I,  and    — 

2      '    32          2    \  l        2  /  32 

are  the  polar  moments  of  inertia,  I  ,  where 


Angle  of  twist  of  a  Shaft. — To  find  the  angle  0  through 
which  the  circular  end  at  B  is  rotated  relatively  to  that  at  A, 

T>/~1 

=  <f>  (radians),   or  BC  =  <f>r 

Also  for  small  angles, 

?rr    =    ^r  =  ft  (radians),  or  BC  =  /?/ 
Ar>  / 

So  that  BC  =  <#»•  =  /?/  or   <#>  =  /?-£- 

Again,  for  the  angular  distortion  /3  =  ^f ,  where  G-  is  the  shear 
modulus ;  so  that  the  above  may  be  written 

/*    /          2T    /  32T/ 

*  ~    G  T        VG^ 

2T 

because  /  has  been  shown  to  =  — »- 

TTf 

For  hollow  shafts 

217 


TORSION  AND  SPRINGS  103 

Expressed  in  degrees,  these  angles  are  respectively 

_2T  j_  180         360  T/ 

TrG    r4     TT        =    7T2Gr4 

For  hollow  shafts 

,0  360  T/ 


Using  diameters  instead  of  radii 

5760T/ 


and  for  hollow  shafts, 

5760T/ 


It  is  the  usual  practice  not  to  allow  0°  to  exceed  1°  in  a  length 
l=20d. 

Horse-power  transmitted.  —  If  T  is  expressed  in  Ib.  -inches, 

T 

then  -=  will  be  the  twisting  moment  expressed  in  Ib.-feet.     And 
j.Z 

the  work  done  by  T  in  one  minute  will  be  —  ^  -  where  N  is  the 

LA 

number  of  revolutions  made  by  the  shaft  in  one  minute.     The 
horse-power  transmitted  will  therefore  be 

TN27T 
= 


12x33,000         16    x  12x33,000 
from  which  approximately, 

H  P 

~    322,000 

From  this  the  diameter  d  of  a  shaft  to  transmit  a  given  H.P. 
at  speed  of  revolution,  N,  can  be  found,  as 


d  _  3/322,000  H.P.    =    67.g     /H.P. 

t 

The  usual  values  given  to  fs  in  practice  are : 

For  wrought  iron  shafts /s  =  5000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 
„    mild  steel  shafts/s  =  6000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 
„    medium-carbon  steel  shafts  fs  =  8000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 


104 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


Torsional  Strength  of  Shafts  in  the  Plastic  State. 

"When  the  twisting  moment  on  a  shaft  is  increased  to  such  a 
point  that  the  material  is  being  stressed  some  way  beyond  the 
limit  of  elasticity,  experiment  seems  to  show  that  the  shear  stress 
s  at  any  radius  x  is  no  longer  proportional  to  x,  but  has  become 
much  more  nearly  constant  and  equal  to  the  stress  fs  at  the 

surface.  The  author  has  found  that 
in  ductile  materials  like  soft  steel 
and  the  best  wrought  iron  s  is 
practically  =  fs  when  the  point  of 
fracture  is  reached.  Therefore,  tak- 
ing s  as  being  equal  to/s,  the  former 
equations  become : 

For  solid  shafts, 


And,  for  hollow  shafts, 


For  shafts  under  working  con- 
ditions the  elastic  limit  is  never 
reached,  and  the  former  set  of 
formulas  are  to  be  used  for  provid- 
ing a  relation  between  the  work- 
ing torsional  moment,  the  safe 
shear  stress,  and  the  dimensions 
of  the  shaft. 

Where  it  is  desired  to  find 
the  twisting  moment  necessary  to  fracture  the  shaft,  the  latter 
set  of  formulas  are  to  be  used,  where  fs  is  the  ultimate  shearing 
strength  of  the  material. 


Loads  and  Deformations  of  Springs. 

Helical  springs  of  round  steel. — In  Fig.  75  is  shown  a 
spring  of  this  type  intended  to  be  loaded  in  tension.  The 
following  applies  equally  well  to  a  compression  spring. 


TORSION  AND  SPRINGS  105 

Here,  let 

P  =  the  load  on  the  spring  acting  along  its  axis. 

D  =  the  mean  diameter  of  the  coil. 

d  =  the  diameter  of  the  wire. 

n  =  number  of  complete  coils. 

G  =  shear  modulus  of  the  material. 
Then  the  length  of  wire  in  the  spring, 


The  effect  of  the  load  is  to  put  upon  the  wire,  throughout  its 
length,  a  torsional  moment  whose  value  is 

PD 

T  =  -JT-  ;  =   PK  where  E  is  the  radius  of  the  coil, 
& 

and  this  results  in  a  twist  of  the  wire,  as  shown  in  Fig.  76. 

Consider  one  coil.     Throughout  the  length  I  of  the  coil  there 
is  the  twisting  moment  T,  due  to  a  force  P  acting  at  the  end  of  an 

arm  —  .     The  twisting  of  the  wire  will  allow  the  point  A  to  move 
relatively  to  B  an  amount  S  where 

*-* 

2 
<j>  being  the  angle  of  twist  for  the  length  in  question,  or. 


But  it  has  previously  been  shown  that 

32T/ 


so  that  8PD3 


for  one  coil.     The  total  extension  for  a  spring  of  n  coils  will 
then  be 


A    = 


The  corresponding  formula  for  springs  of  square  metal  is : 


106 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  above  are  only  true  so  long  as  the 
strains  are  relatively  small,  so  that  S  is  sensibly  =  ^-,  and  not 

a 

D 

-  tan 


*,     8 


__£ j 


1 


FIG.  76. 


For  spring  steel  the  value  of  G-  varies  from  12,000,000  Ibs.  per 
sq.  in.  to  14,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 


TORSION  AND  SPRINGS  107 

Example  1.  —  A  solid  steel  shaft  is  to  transmit  600  H.P.  at  a 
speed  of  58  revolutions  per  minute.  Find  the  diameter  of  the 
shaft.  The  stress  in  the  metal  must  not  exceed  8000  Ibs.  per 
sq.  in. 


HP     = 


12x33,000 
and  3  /  H7iVxT37000  x~l  2 


-v 

=   7-46  ins. 


3  /600  x  33,000 jxJ2  x  16 
2  xV2~x" 58^8000 


Example  2. — A  shaft  3  ins.  in  diameter,  running  at  250 
revolutions  per  minute,  transmits  50  H.P.  Find  the  maximum 
stress. 

Using  the  same  symbols  as  above, 


12x33,000 
H.P.  x  12x33,000 


and         fs   = 


50x12x33000x16 
2  x  7T2  x  250  x  (3)3 

/.  The  maximum  stress  =  2378  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

^Example  3. — A  spring  of  steel  of  circular  section  containing 
five  coils  is  subjected  to  compressive  loads  in  a  testing  machine. 
Loads  are  applied  and  readings  taken  of  the  lengths.  A  piece 
of  the  steel  is  then  subjected  to  tension  loads.  Loads  are 
applied  and  readings  taken  on  a  length  of  15  cm.  The  outside 
diameter  of  the  spring  is  4*8  ins.  and  the  diameter  of  the  steel 
0'96  in.  Find  the  shear  modulus  and  the  modulus  of  direct 
elasticity. 


108 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


Let  G-  =  shear  modulus  in  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

E  =  modulus  of  elasticity  in  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 
P  =  load  on  spring  (compressive)  in  Ibs. 
D  =  mean  diameter  of  spring  in  inches. 
d  =  diameter  of  the  steel  in  inches. 
A   =  the  compression  on  the  spring  in  inches. 
n  —  the  number  of  coils  in  the  spring. 

Mean  diameter  of  spring, 

D   =   4-8-0-96 
=   3-84  ins. 

TABLE  OF   READINGS  TAKEN  WHEN  THE  SPRING  WAS  COMPRESSED. 


Loads,  tons  . 

* 

ft 

1 

1 

u 

1ft 

IS 

Length  of  5  coils,  ins. 

7-39 

7'24 

7-09 

6-95 

6-81 

6-66 

6-52 

Compressions 

— 

0-15 

0-15 

0-14 

0-14 

0-15 

0-14 

Loads,  tons  . 

2 

2| 

2i 

2| 

3 

3| 

Length  of  5  coils,  ins. 

6-38 

6-25 

6-11 

5-98 

5-84 

5-67 

Compressions 

0-14 

0-13 

0-14 

0-13 

0-14 

0-17 

The  average  compression  (from  \  to  3  tons)  for  \  ton 
1-55 


11 


=  01409  in. 


The  shear  modulus 


8  x  560  x  5  x  (3-84)3 
0-1409  x  (0-96)4 

-    10,590,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

In  the  tension  test  on  a  piece  of  the  same  steel,  the  readings 
were  taken  on  15  cm.  =  5*905  ins. 


TORSION  AND  SPRINGS 


109 


Let  E  =  the  elastic  modulus  in  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

/  =  the  length  on  which  readings  were  taken  in  inches. 
/  =  the  stress  in  the  metal  in  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 
x  =  the  elongation  in  inches. 
W  =  the  load  applied  to  produce  x,  in  Ibs. 
A  =  the  cross-sectional  area  of  the  metal  in  sq.  ins. 

TABLE  OF  EXTENSIONS. 


Load  in  Tons      .         .         •       k 

4 

I 

1 

U 

1* 

If 

2 

Extensions,  TTnnfth  in.         .       0 

0-14 

0-29 

0-45 

0-605 

0-76 

0-915 

1-065 

I 
Differences 

0-14 

0-15 

0-16 

0-155 

0-155 

0-155 

0-15 

Load  in  tons 

2* 

2* 

2| 

3 

3i 

3* 

3| 

4 

Extensions,  T^th  in.  . 

1-22 

1-38 

1-525 

1-68 

1-825 

1-985 

2-14 

2-295 

Differences   . 

0.155 

0-16 

0-145 

0-155 

0-145 

0-16 

0-155 

0-155 

The  average  extension  (from  J  to  4  tons)  for  J  ton 

2-295 

=  =  0-15,3  YoVo^hs  or  an  in., 

lo 

i.e.,         a;   =    0-000153  in. 
The  stress  per  sq.  in.  of  sectional  area  of  the  metal 


E    = 


The  modulus  of  elasticity 

n 

x 

Wl 
Ax 


560  x  5-905 


0-7854  x  (0-96)*  x  0-000153 
=    29,860,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 
The  ratio  of 

The  modulus  of  elasticity  :  The  shear  modulus 
is  as :— 29,860,000  :  10,590,000 
i.e.,         2-819  :  1 


CHAPTEE   X 
TORSION  COMBINED  WITH  BENDING 

IT  often  occurs  in  practice  that  a  shaft  has  not  only  to  withstand 
a  torsional  moment  T,  but  is  so  supported  and  loaded  that  there 
is  a  bending  moment  acting  at  the  same  time.  The  most  usual 
instances  of  this  kind  occur  in  shafts  which  run  in  bearings  some 
distance  apart  and  carry  heavy  wheels  or  pulleys  between  the 
bearings,  and  in  the  crank-shafts  of  engines. 

On  Fig.  77  is  shown  a  typical  case.     A  force  acts  at  right 


angles  to  the  centre  line  of  a  crank  of  radius  B,  giving  rise  to  a 

twisting  moment 

T  -  PB 

In  plan  the  line  of  action  of  P  is  distant  H  from  the  centre  of  the 

no 


TORSION  COMBINED  WITH  BENDING 


111 


nearer  bearing,  so  that  on  the  section  of  the  shaft  at  XY  there  is, 
in  addition  to  T,  a  bending  moment 

M  =  PH 

On  Fig.  78  is  shown  an  enlarged  view  of  the  portion  of  the 
shaft  near  0,  the  force 
P  being  supposed  normal 
to  the  paper.  In  the 
centre  of  the  shaft,  at 
the  point  marked  by  the 
circle  and  on  the  section 
made  by  XY,  there  will  be 
a  maximum  direct  stress 
due  to  M.  If  P  acts  to- 
wards the  paper,  this  will 
be  a  tensile  stress ;  if  from 
the  paper,  the  material  will 
be  in  compression  at  this 
point.  At  the  same  point 
there  will  also  be  a  shear 
stress  caused  by  the  twist- 
ing moment  T.  Call  the 
direct  stress  /  and  the 
shear  stress  ff  There 
will  be  a  shear  stress 

along  YX,  and  it  has  previously  been  shown  that  there  must  be 
a  shear  stress  of  equal  intensity  on  planes  at  right  angles  to  YX. 

Next,  consider  an  elemental  triangular  solid  ABC,  of  uniform 
thickness,  at  the  surface  of  the  shaft,  and  which  is  kept  in 
equilibrium  by  the  stresses  acting  on  its  faces,  and  which  is  of 
such  proportions  that  the  resultant  stress  in  its  diagonal  AC  is 
wholly  normal.  Call  the  angle  CAB  =  0. 

On  AB  is  the  shear  stress  fs,  on  BC  is  the  direct  stress  /  and 
also  the  shear  stress  fs,  and  on  AC  is  the  resulting  normal 
stress  fn. 

The  total  normal  stress  on  AC  =  /nAC.  Eesolving  this  hori- 
zontally and  vertically : 

(Horizontal  component)  =/wAC  sin  0  = 
(Vertical  component)       =  /WAC  cos  0  =  fsBG 


FIG.  78. 


112  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

From  which 

/AB 
/.-/-     ^=fs™^ 

and 


Subtracting  (b)  from  (a), 

-/=/.(cot  0-tan 

-  2/8  cot  2# 


tan  20  =     --  (1) 

This  gives  two  values  of  20  differing  by  180°,  and  two  values 
of  0  differing  by  90°. 

Now  multiply  the  above  two  equations  (OL)  and  (&)  together  : 


This  last  equation  will  be  made  use  of  for  combining  the  torsion 
and  bending  moments. 

Here  r  =.   Mr         4M 

and  f          2T 

./<-  ..q 


Now  /„'-//„  =  /.' 

This  is  a  quadratic  whose  solution  gives 

/»  =  T  ±  VT 


2M  4M2 


" 


"  ^  =    M  ± 

?rr3 
Putting  -^-  /n  =  TE  where  T^  is  a  twisting  moment  which, 

acting  alone  on  the  shaft  in  question,  would  produce  a  stress  of 
magnitude  fn  in  the  material,  and  is  called  the  equivalent  twisting 


TORSION  COMBINED  WITH  BENDING 


113 


moment,   the   above   may  be  written,   taking  the  plus  value  as 
being  .the  greater, 


or,  if  M^  is  the  equivalent  bending  moment, 


that  is, 


ME=  JM  + 


+  T2 


The  stress  fn,  brought  about  by  the  torsion  and  bending 
moments  acting  simultaneously,  may  be  taken  as  being  a  tensile 
stress  on  AC,  a  compressive  stress  on  HG  at  right  angles  to  AC, 
or  a  shear  stress  on  planes  making  angles  of  45°  with  these.  See 
Fig.  79. 


FIG.  79. 


'  From  equation  (1),  knowing  fs  and  /,  it  is  possible  to  calculate 
the  angle  which  the  plane,  whose  stress  is  wholly  normal,  makes 
with  the  axis. 

Where  there  is  no  bending,  and/=o, 


and 


Tan  20  =  (infinity) 
20  =  90° 

0  =  45° 


114 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


That  this  is  so  is  very  forcibly  illustrated  in  the  case  of  a  cast 
iron  shaft  broken  under  pure  torsion,  when  it  is  seen  that  the 

surface  of  failure  takes  a  spiral 
form,  the  helix  making  an  angle  of 
45°  with  the  axis.  Such  a  fracture 
is  shown  on  Fig.  80  (a). 

Where  there  is  bending  as  well 
as  torsion,  the  angle  6  is  greater 
than  as  indicated  in  Fig.  80  (b). 

The  formula 


FIG.  80. 

is  the  one  given  by  Eankine,  but, 

according  to  the  more  complete  theory  of  elasticity,  when  Poisson's 
Eatio  is  taken  into  account,  this  is  not  strictly  true.  Grashof 
gives  the  more  correct  value  as 


Example.  —  A  steel  shaft  is  supported  in  two  bearings  40  ins.  from 
centre  to  centre,  and  midway  between  these  carries  a  pulley  weigh- 
ing 10  tons.  410  H.P.  are  transmitted  through  the  shaft  at  98 
revolutions  per  minute.  Find  the  diameter  when  the  stress  in  the 
material  does  not  exceed  3J  tons  per  sq.  in. 


M    =    ™^  =  100  in.-tons, 

2i 

(H.  P.)  12  33,000 
T   =   L     2.-N2240     —  H8  m.-tons. 


Here 

and 

Then  TE 

=  100  +  V(100)2+  (118)2 
=  255  in.-tons. 
And,  finally,  the  diameter 

j  __  \\    -&' 

^^r 


255  x  16 


-   7'2  ins. 


CHAPTEE   XI 


STRENGTH   OF   CYLINDERS 

Thin  Cylinders.  —  In  a  cylinder  of  length  I  (see  Fig.  81),  whose 
thickness,  t,  is  small  relatively  to  its  internal  diameter,  d,  and 
which  is  subjected   to  an  internal  pressure  of  intensity,  p,  the 
total    force    tending    to 
lift  the  upper  half  from 
the  lower  half  is  pdl,  or 

p2rl  where  r  =  -~-  —  the 

2i 

internal  radius. 

To  this  separation  is 
opposed  the  resisting 
stress  in  the  material. 
The  area  on  which  this 
stress  /  acts  is  tl  on 
each  side,  or,  altogether, 
2tl,  so  that  the  total 
opposing  pdl  is 
Therefore, 

pdl  =  2ftl,  or  pd  =  2ft,  or  pr  =  ft. 

If  the  ends  of  the  cylinder  are  closed,  as  in  the  case  of  a 
boiler,  there  is  a  stress  fe  induced  on  the  annular  section  made  by 
a  plane  AB  at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  the  cylinder.  Now  the 

total  pressure  on  the  end  is  p  -^-  d2. 

This  is  resisted  by  fe  acting  on  a  ring  whose  area  is  very 
nearly  irdt.  So  that, 


force 
f2tl. 


FlG   81< 


pd  = 


or 


pd   _  pr 
47     ~  2t 


115 


116 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


But,  from  the  last  equation,  the  stress  on  a  longitudinal  section 


' 

is  •£-,  and,  therefore, 

t 


Stress  on  a  transverse  section 
Stress  on  a  longitudinal  section 


PL 

1L 
PL 


Thick    Cylinders. — In  what   has  just  been  said  about  thin 

cylinders,  where  the  ratio  —  is  large,  the  stress  is  assumed  to  be 

t 

sensibly  uniform  throughout  the  thickness. 

Where  —  is  small  and  has  a  value  of  from  about  8  to  3,  the 
t 

cylinder  is  called  thick,  and  must  be  treated  in  a  different  manner. 
For  a  cylinder  of  this  kind,  subjected  to  an  internal  pressure, 

the  greatest  tensile 
stress  is  on  the  inside 
surface.  The  pressure 
upon  the  thin  cylinder 
lying  next  the  inside 
is  balanced  partly  by 
the  resistance  to  stress 
of  its  own  material  and 
partly  by  the  support 
it  receives  from  the 
material  which  lies  im- 
mediately outside  it. 

FIG   82  So    that    the    internal 

pressure       upon       the 

second  layer  is  less  than  that  upon  the  first,  and  so  on,  each 
successive  layer  from  inside  to  outside  being  subjected  to  a  smaller 
tensile  stress.  The  precise  nature  of  the  stress  variation  in  the 
walls  of  a  thick  cylinder  is  given  in  the  following.  The  section 
of  such  a  cylinder  is  shown  in  Fig.  82. 

In  this  proof  it  is  assumed  that  a  plane  section -of  the  cylinder 
before  pressure  is  applied  remains  plane  when  under  stress;  that 
is,  there  is  no  distortion  of  the  plane  section.  The  material  is 
supposed  to  be  elastic,  and  it  must  also  be  supposed  that  the 
stresses  in  the  material  only  vary  with  the  distance  from  the 
centre — i.e.,  at  the  same  radius  there  is  the  same  stress.  Take  a 


STRENGTH  OF  CYLINDERS  117 

slice  of  the  cylinder  of  thickness  EF.  Consider  the  elemental 
ring  of  thickness  Sr.  Since  the  stress  is  practically  uniform 
throughout  this  ring,  it  is  only  necessary  to  consider  the  small 
portion  of  it  ABCD.  This  portion  is  shown  more  in  detail  on 
Fig.  83. 

Three  stresses  act  on  this  piece,  namely, 

p,  radially, 
/,  circumferentially, 
and  /p  longitudinally. 

These  are  taken  as  having  plus  signs  when  acting  away  from  the 
centre  of  the  elemental  cube  ABCD.  The  strains,  radially, 
circumferentially,  and  longitudinally,  caused  by  the  three  stresses, 
are: 

Due  to  stress  p.  Due  to  stress/.  Due  to  stress  fr 

«=^£  a  =  ^£  a-  -A. 

w/E  wE  E 

~P_  f  -/i 

2       /xE  E  a2~    ^E 

-»=  -i-  -  if  *-  4 

lli  //JCi  //Jjj 

-  being  Poisson's  Eatio.     Hence  total  strains  are : 
A  JL          (P+/) 

1     '  E  yuE 

A  _/-         (P+/i) 

E  y^E 

A  P  C/+/l) 

^Vq          i~^       -  ^^, 

E  pR 

Now,  as  the  plane  normal  section  is  always  plane,  the  longi- 
tudinal strain  Al  will  be  a  constant,  but  -—  is  a  constant,  and 
often  /j  =  0. "  Hence,  p  +  /  —  constant.  This  may  be  put : 

P+/-2X  (1) 

For  radius  r,  by  theory  of  thin  cylinders,  2pr  =  force  tending  to 
fracture  ring  outwardly. 


118 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


Also,  2(p  +  Sp)(r+8r)  =  force  tending  to  crush  ring  inwards 
and  2fSr  =  circumferential  force  tending  to  push  ring  outwards. 
These  forces  balance,  hence 

2/Sr,  or  (p  +  8p)  (r  +  8r)  -  pr  =/Sr 


Hence,  in  limit,  when  Sp  and  Sr  are  indefinitely  diminished, 

d(pr)=fdr 
Hence 

+  rdp  =  f 

This  gives 


or, 


(2) 


-  2Xr 


Hence,  integrating,^2  =  Xr2  +Y  (Y=  constant).     Therefore, 


and 


/-«-•£ 


STRENGTH  OF  CYLINDERS  119 

These  are  the  fundamental  equations,  and  may  be  applied  to 
the  following  cases : — 

Case  of  Hydraulic  Cylinder. 

Let  P  =  internal  pressure  and  Prt  =  external  pressure,  from  (3), 


.   Y 


therefore, 

/T>       "p  N  "p   2  T?   2 

11    —  Jr     )  -*-^i      ^o  —  V.1  Jlt'l    —  "*"     JLI'') 

Y  = p  /_  R  2 and  X    =   -         R  2_p  2 

and 

Neglecting   external   pressure,   Pa  =  0,   the  maximum   stress 
(at  KT)  is  given  by 


F  =  _j_^|_rqj  (5) 

of  external  pressure  being  great  compared  with  internal 
pressure. 

In  this  case  P  =  0.     Equation  (4)  then  gives : 

PT?2i"PR2  OT>P2 

Jtu/  +  Jr  Ko  ^Jr.lt0 


This  is  evidently  a  compressive  stress. 

Example  1. — A  steel  boiler  8  ft.  diameter,  with  working  pressure 
150  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  and  safe  stress  =  6  tons  per  sq.  in.    To  find  t : 


R  =  4  ft.  =  48  ins.          t/'=  6  tons  per  sq.  in.  p  =  150  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

48  x  150 
••'    '  -  61T2240  '  °'53  ln' 


120  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

Example  2.  —  Hydraulic  cylinder,  6  ins.  inside  radius,  internal 
pressure,^?  =  1100  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  Safe  F=l  ton  per  sq..  in.  Find 
thickness  :  — 

i    ^ 

V_        R.,2  -  V  R,2 

F      :   8,1+11,1  ='  V 

h  R 


1100  +  -  2240  -224R°*62 

Rr  K2 

(1100R22+  1100x36)   =   (2240R22  -  2240  x  36) 
1140R22   =    3340x36    =    120100 
R22   =    105-3 
R2   =       10-2 

Thickness  of  material  =  10'2  —  6  =  4'2  ins. 

Variation    of    circumferential    and    radial    stresses    in    thick 
cylinders  subjected  to  internal  pressure  P  alone. 

This  is  the  most  usual   case   in   practice.      Here  Pa  =  0  and 
/=  circumferential  stress  at  any  radius  r 

2 


and  p  =  radial  stress  at  any  distance  r  from  the  centre, 


Taking  various  values  of  r,  the  corresponding  values  of  f  and 
p  are  plotted  on  Fig.  84.  The  working  is  given  in  Example  5 
below.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  circumferential  stress  /,  which  is 
the  most  important  to  be  considered  in  this  connection,  varies 
from  a  maximum  value  on  the  inside  surface  to  a  minimum  on  the 
outside. 

This  means  that  the  material  on  the  inside  is  doing  more  than 
its  share  in  withstanding  tension;  and,  in  order  to  equalise  the 
tension  stress  under  the  maximum  pressure  in  such  cylinders  as 
guns,  it  is  usual  to  impose  an  initial  compressive  stress  in  the 
material.  This  stress  is  greatest  on  the  inside  surface,  and 


STRENGTH  OF  CYLINDERS 


121 


diminishes  towards  the  outside,  the  result  being  that  when  the 
internal  pressure  is  applied,  the  algebraic  sum  of  the  initial  and 


FIG.  84. 

induced  stresses  is  more  nearly  uniform  than  would  otherwise  be 
the  case. 

In  guns  this  initial 
compressive  stress  is  at- 
tained by  winding  succes- 
sive layers  of  wire  round 
the  inner  tube,  the  wire 
being  kept  under  a  uniform 
tension,  or  one  which  has 
a  predetermined  variation,  f 
This  effect  is  shown  in 
Fig.  85;  here  the  initial 
compression  stresses  are 
plotted  upwards  and  ten- 
sile stresses  downwards. 

The  stresses  indicated  by  FlG  85 

the  curves  are  there   due 
to  the  winding  alone,  before  there  is  any  internal  pressure. 


122 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


On  Fig.  86  is  shown  how  the  initial  stress  due  to  cooling  of 
the  metal  in  cast  cylinders  varies  from  point  to  point.  The 
metal  on  the  inside  and  on  the  outside  cools  first,  and  as  the 
intermediate  part  cools  it  shrinks,  putting  itself  in  circumferential 
tension,  while  the  inner  and  outer  parts  are  in  compression. 
It  has  been  shown  that 

P_        R22  -  RT2 
F      =    R^  +  R!* 

and  from  this  it  follows  that  if  F  be  the  ultimate  tensile  stress  of 
a  brittle  material  like  cast  iron,  or  the  yield  stress  of  a  more 

ductile  material,  then  when  P  is 
made  =  F,  the  E2  must  be  infinitely 
great.  In  other  words,  it  is  im- 
possible in  a  thick  cylinder  with 
no  initial  stress  to  use  a  pressure 
which  is  greater  than  F,  however 
thick  the  walls  may  be. 

If  this  were  attempted,  failure 
would  take  place  by  cracks  be- 
ginning on  the  inside  and  extend- 
ing outwards. 

Example  3. — A  thick  cylinder 
is  built  up  so  that  the  initial 
tensile  stress  of  the  outer  and  the  compressive  stress  of  the  inner 
skin  are  both  3  tons  per  sq.  in.  Calculate  the  resultant  stress  of 
both  skins  when  under  internal  fluid  pressure  of  4J  tons  per 
sq.  in.  Diameter,  20  ins.  external  and  10  ins.  internal. 
Considering  cylinder  without  initial  stresses, 

f^    =    stress  on  inner  skin    = 

95  15 

=   —  —    =    —    =    7'5  tons  per  sq.  in. 

PR  ^ 
fQ   =    stress  on  outer  skin    =        * 

=    7'5  x  J    =    1J  tons  per  sq.  in. 

Hence  resultant  stress  on  outer  skin 

=  If +  3  =  4J  tons  per  sq.  in. 

Eesultant  stress  on  inner  skin 

=    7  J  _  3  =   41  tons  per  sq.  in. 


FIG.  86. 


STRENGTH  OF  CYLINDERS  123 

Example  4. — Find  maximum  and  minimum  stresses  in  the 
walls  of  a  thick  cylinder ;  internal  diameter  8  ins.  and  external 
diameter  14  ins.  Internal  fluid  pressure,  2000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

T?  2    I    "D  2 

Maximum  stress  is  at  inner  radius,  and  =  PW^ — ^r? 
=    2000  x— '      |    =    2000  ||  =  3940  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

Minimum  stress  is  at  outer  radius,  and  =    ^  *  f  =^_ — _L  J 

130,000  16 
=    — ^3—49    =    1286  Ibs.  per  sq.  m. 

Example  5. — In  a  cylinder  where  Ex  =  l,  E2  =  4,  find  the 
values  of  /  at  radii  increasing  by  half -inches.  P  =  1000  Ibs.,  and 
plot  the  curve  (Fig.  84). 

At  inside  radius 

P(R22  +  RT2)         1000(16  +  1)   _     1000x17 

j  •  >   o        T)    o  i  /*        I  T~eE  —  OO  1  OS* 

At  any  other  radius,  r, 


f       1000x1  16 

At  radius  I'D  ins.  j  =  — -^ x   1 


15  2-25 

=  66-6  x  8-1  =  539-5  Ibs. 

2  „     /  =  66-6  x  5  -  339       „ 
2-5    „     /  =  66-6  x  3-56  =  237/    „ 

3  „     /=  66-6x2-7  =  180  /  „ 
3-5    „     /  =  66-6  x  2-3  =  153  J  „ 

4  „     /  =  66-6  x  2  =133       „ 

2PR  2 
or  at  outside  radius/  =    ^ — ^ 

" 


2  x  1000  x  1         2000 
15 =   15"   =    133  lbs< 


124  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

2 


PR  2  R  2 T^ 

Also,  using  formula,^-^1  pg2-^-^  the  values  of  the  radial 


r2 
stresses  are  found  as  follow  : — 


At  radius  1      in.    p  =  1000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

„           1-5  ins.  p  =  408  „           „ 

2  „    p  -  200  „ 
2-5    „   p  =  104  „ 

3  „    p  =  52  „ 

„          3'5    „    p  =  21  „           „ 
0 


„ 


Strength  of  Thin  and  Thick  Spherical  Shells.— Using  the  same 
notations  as  before,  for  thin  shells 

p          2t_         4* 

7          r  rf 

And  for  thick  shells 

jP         2R28-2R18 
F         " 


CHAPTEE     XII 

RIVETED  JOINTS 

THE  full  discussion  of  the  subject  of  riveted  joints  in  all  its 
detail  really  comes  under  the  head  of  "  Machine  Design,"  but  it 
may  not  be  out  of  place  here  to  notice  some  of  the  chief  problems 
so  far  as  they  relate  to  the  strength  properties  of  the  materials 
used. 

Of  the  many  forms  of  joint  employed  for  connecting  together 
the  edges  of  iron  and  steel  plates,  those  illustrated  on  the  following 
sketches  may  be  taken  as  among  the  more  usual. 


I 

I 

I 

) 

1 

.  *  — 

JO     O 

0 
O 

O 

o 

FIG.  87. 


FIG.  88. 


The  single  riveted  lap-joint  shown  on  Fig.  87  is  the  simplest. 
The  edges  of  the  two  plates  overlap,  and  there  is  one  row  of 
rivets  which  pass  through  the  two  plates. 

Fig.  88  represents  a  single  riveted  butt-joint,  where  the  main 
plates  come  edge  to  edge,  and  each  is  connected  to  an  auxiliary 
plate,  called  a  cover  plate,  by  a  single  row  of  rivets. 


125 


126 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


The  double  riveted  lap-joint  on  Fig.  89  has  two  rows  of  rivets 
arranged  diagonally  or  zigzag. 

On  Fig.  90  is  shown  a  similar  joint  to  that  on  Fig.  88,  but 
with  double  riveting  and  two  cover  plates. 


FIG.  89. 


The  usual  theory  upon  which  the  proportions  of  riveted  joints 
are  made  to  depend  is  somewhat  as  follows : — 

It  is  assumed  that  a  joint  may  fail  in  one  of  five  different 


•>VsK\\S> 


O 

1 

O 

0  ! 

O 

o 

1 
1 

O 

O 

O 

o 

1 
1 
1 

O 

—  _^^ 

n  i 

—  —    ' 

g 

FIG.  90. 

ways.      Considering   the   simplest  case  of  a  strip  of    the  plate 
joined  by  a  single  rivet,  these  are  (Fig.  91)  : — 

(a)  By  the  shearing  of  the  rivet. 

(&)  By  the  tearing  of  the  plate  through  the  rivet  hole. 

(c)  By  the  rivet  breaking  through  the  plate  in  front  of  it. 


RIVETED  JOINTS 


127 


(d)  By  the  rivet  crushing  the  material  of  the  plate  in  front 

of  it. 

(e)  By  the  rivet  shearing  out  that  part  of  the  plate  which 

is  in  front  of  it. 


1- — 


FIG.  91. 


Now,  calling 

p  =  the  pitch;  that  is,  the  distance  from  centre  to  centre 
measured  along  the  line  of  the  rivets ;  this  will  be 
the  same  as  the  width  of  the  strip ; 
t  =  the  thickness  of  the  plate ; 
d  =  the  diameter  of  the  rivet ; 
I  =  the  lap  of  the  plate;    that  is,  the  distance  from  the 

edge  of  the  rivet  hole  to  the  edge. of  the  plate; 
ft  =  the  tensile  resistance  of  the  plate ; 
fg  =  the  shearing  resistance  of  the  rivet ; 
fc  =  the  crushing  strength  of  the  plate ; 

then  the  resistance  of  the  joint,  in  Fig.  91,  to  failure  in  each 
of  the  five  ways  enumerated  above,  will  be : 


7T 


(a)  Eesistance  to  shearing  of  rivet  =  fs  —  d2 

(&)   Eesistance  to  tearing  of  plate  =ftt(p  —  d) 

tl2 
(c)    Eesistance  to  breaking  through  plate  =  C-r 


128  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

This  is  a  case  of  a  short  beam,  fixed  at  the  ends,  and  of 
span  d,  depth  I,  and  breadth  t,  C  being  a  constant  depending  on 
the  material. 

The  value  of  C  is  given  by  some  authorities  as  about  45  tons. 

(d)  Kesistance  of  plate  to  crushing  =fctd 

(e)  Eesistance  of  plate  to  shearing  =  3/X~o~ 

\  Zi 

An  economically  designed  joint  should  be  as  ready  to  fail  in 
one  way  as  another  ;  that  is  — 


Generally  speaking,  (d)  and  (e)  are  not  considered,  as  it  is 
found  that  if  the  joint  designed  according  to  the  usual  rules  is 
strong  enough  to  resist  (a),  (b),  and  (c),  it  will  be  sufficiently  strong 
for  the  other  two. 

Assuming  that  t  is  given,  the  diameter  of  the  rivets  must  first 
be  found.  To  do  this,  it  is  found  that  the  following  empirical 
rule  gives  the  most  satisfactory  results  for  plates  of  the  more 
usual  sizes:  — 

d   =    1'25\/  t  for  boiley  work 
or         d   =    I'l  \/  t   for  bridge  work 

Now,  taking  the  former  of  these  values,  and  equating  (&) 
and  (a), 


But         d12   =   (1-25)2* 

and         fg   =    0'8ft,  very  nearly 

p-d   --    0-8x^-x(l-25)2 
or  p   ==   d  +  0-98  in. 

This  is  from  purely  theoretical  considerations,  but  it  is  found 
from  experiment  that  the  pitch  must  be  somewhat  greater, 
especially  in  the  case  of  punched  holes,  where  the  metal  of  the 
plate  is  damaged  by  the  punching  for  a  small  distance  round 
the  hole. 

The  following  values,  based  on  the  experiments  on  riveted 


RIVETED  JOINTS  129 

joints  carried   out  by  the  Institution  of  Mechanical  Engineers, 
may  be  used  :  — 


For  iron  plates  and  ri  vets  (Punched     '  '  /»  =  «*+!  '50  ins. 

I  Drilled       .  .  p  =  d+  1-40  ins. 

For  steel  plates  and  rivets{Punched    '  '  P  =  d+l'l3  ins. 

iDrilled       .  .  p  =  d+lin. 

To  find  the  overlap,  /,  equate  (c)  to  (&). 


=   0-8  *J~d 

Practical  conditions,  however,  would  seem  to  make  it  neces- 
sary to  increase  this  to  about  l'l\/d.  This  means  that,  instead 
of  (c)  being  equal  in  strength  to  (b),  it  is  so  far  stronger  that  there 
is  not  likely  to  be  any  possibility  of  failure  taking  place  in  this 
direction. 

It  is  important  to  remember  that  the  pitch  is  partly  dependent 
on  the  resistance  of  the  rivet  material  to  shear.  In  most  cases  the 
rivets  are  made  from  a  material  which  is  softer  and  more  ductile 
than  that  used  for  the  plates. 

For  a  given  ductile  material  the  shearing  strength  may  be 
taken  as  approximately  equal  to  four-fifths  of  the  tensile  strength. 

Efficiency  of  Riveted  Joints.  —  The  tearing  resistance  of  the 
plate  on  a  section  taken  through  the  centres  of  the  holes  isftt  (p  —  d), 
and  the  tensile  resistance  of  the  same  length  of  the  original  plate 
isfttp.  The  former  of  these  is  obviously  less  than  the  latter,  on 
account  of  the  metal  being  cut  away  in  making  the  rivet  holes. 
For  any  given  joint  the  ratio  of  one  of  these  to  the  other  is  called 
the  efficiency  of  the  joint.  In  other  words,  the  efficiency  is  the 
fraction  of  the  strength  of  the  plate  which  the  joint  provides. 


Theoretically,  the  efficiency  is  -—*-.  --  or  *•  -  ,  but  it  is  actually 

found  that  the  efficiency  is  somewhat  less  for  the  reasons  already 
mentioned  as  to  the  tensile  strength  per  square  inch  of  the  drilled 
or  punched  plate  being  less  than  that  of  the  uncut  plate.  If  some 

I 


130 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


of  these  efficiencies  are  calculated  it  will  be  found  that  they  are 
greater  for  the  smaller  sizes  of  plates,  and  that,  for  a  given  size  of 
plate,  the  efficiency  is  greater  where  there  are  two  rows  of  rivets 
than  where  there  is  only  one,  and  still  greater  for  treble  riveted 
joints. 

The  following  figures  will  serve  to  give  an  approximate  idea  of 
the  values  to  be  expected : — 

EFFICIENCIES  OF  DIFFERENT  RIVETED  JOINTS. 


Punched  Holes. 

Drilled  Holes. 

Size  of  plates  .... 

Jin. 

fin. 

lin. 

4  in. 

fin. 

lin. 

Single  Riveting  — 

Iron  plates  —  Iron  rivets 
Steel  plates  —  Steel  rivets 

56 
51 

51 
47 

48 
44 

59 

54 

54 
49 

50 
46 

Double  Riveting  — 

Iron  plates  —  Iron  rivets 
Steel  plates—  Steel  rivets     . 

72 
68 

68 
64 

65 
61 

74 
70 

70 
66 

66 
63 

Treble  Riveting  — 
Steel  plates  —  Steel  rivets 

78 

74 

71 

The  above  efficiencies  are  all  given  as  percentages. 


CHAPTEK    XIII 

STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS  AS  FOUND  FROM  THE 
RESULTS   OF   TESTS 

IN  designing  any  kind  of  engineering  structure  the  form  and 
dimensions  are  made  such  that  the  loads  which  are  likely  to 
come  upon  it  will  not  give  rise  to  more  than  a  certain  pre- 
determined stress  in  any  part.  In  order  to  decide  upon  the 
amount  of  stress  which  may  be  allowed  upon  any  given  material 
when  loaded  in  some  particular  manner,  the  strength  of  the 
material  must  be  determined  by  experiment.  An  ideal  kind  of 
experiment  which  might  be  made  upon  a  structure  would  be  to 
test  the  structure  as  a  whole  with  loads  which  are  as  nearly  the 
actual  loads  as  possible,  and  afterwards  to  carry  them  beyond 
their  working  values  and  see  what  happened.  But  it  is  not  often 
that  full-sized  pieces  can  be  tested,  partly  because  the  making  of 
an  actual  structural  piece  which  is  to  be  immediately  destroyed 
is  costly,  and,  what  is  more  important,  there  are  few  testing 
machines  which  will  accommodate  full-sized  pieces,  except  very 
small  ones.  Testing  of  this  kind  is,  in  spite  of  the  difficulties  in 
the  way,  sometimes  carried  out,  and  always  yields  valuable  results. 

Testing. — By  testing  is  generally  meant  the  loading  in  a  testing 
machine  of  samples  of  the  material,  either  specially  prepared  or 
cut  from  the  material  which  is  being  used.  When  in  the  test- 
ing machine  observations  are  taken  for  the  purpose  of  finding 
out  what  happens  to  the  material  when  under  the  load. 

These  tests  may  be  carried  out,  first,  for  the  purpose  of 
ascertaining  new  facts  about  a  given  material,  as  to  its  behaviour 
under  certain  given  conditions,  which  is  really  a  form  of  research ; 
and,  in  the  second  place,  with  the  idea  of  ascertaining  whether 
material  supplied  by  a  maker  possesses  all  the  qualities  which 
have  been  specified  by  the  user.  These  last  are  commercial  tests. 

131 


132  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

Specimens  of  the  metals  may  be  tested  in  tension,  compression, 
shear,  bending,  and  torsion ;  but,  except  in  the  case  of  cast  iron,  it  is 
generally  sufficient  to  make  the  first  of  these  tests  for  the  purpose 
of  ascertaining  the  quality  of  the  material.  The  reason  is  probably 
that  the  tensile  test  is  the  simplest  and  most  easy  to  carry  out, 
and  because  it  leads  to  some  five  or  six  different  quantities,  each  of 
which  is  capable  of  providing  information  regarding  some  different 
quality  in  the  material. 

In  a  tension  test  a  sample  of  the  material,  generally  in  the 
form  of  a  bar,  is  taken  hold  of  at  each  end  and  pulled  with  an 
increasing  amount  of  force.  The  function  of  the  testing  machine 
is  to  apply  this  pull  at  the  will  of  the  experimenter  and  at  the 
same  time  to  indicate  its  magnitude. 

The  observations  usually  made  during  the  application  of  load 
to  a  test  bar  are,  in  addition  to  the  magnitude  of  the  load  itself, 
the  following : — 

1.  A  series  of  measurements  of  the  deformations  accompany- 

ing the  loads  may  be  taken  by  using  an  exten- 
someter,  so  as  to  make  it  possible  for  the  modulus  of 
elasticity  to  be  calculated.  This  is  rarely  done  in  com- 
mercial work,  though  there  may  be  occasions  when  an 
exact  determination  is  required  to  satisfy  a  specification. 

2.  Such   observations  are   taken   as  are  necessary  to  fix  the 

yield  point  load.  Something  has  already  been  said 
about  the  elastic  limit,  proportional  limit,  and  the  yield 
point,  and  this  will  be  again  discussed  more  fully.  For 
the  present  it  is  sufficient  to  say  that  the  load  on  the 
specimen  is  increased  until  the  yield  point  has  been 
reached,  and  is  then  noted.  The  yield  point  may 
be  found  by  using  dividers,  and  seeing  when  a  certain 
marked  length  of  the  bar  begins  to  rapidly  increase  with- 
out any  increase  in  load ;  or  by  noting  the  point  when 
the  weigh  beam  of  the  testing  machine  is  seen  to  drop 
quickly  on  to  its  lower  stop  owing  to  the  rapid  stretch  of 
the  material. 

3.  After  the  yield  point  is  passed  the  load  is  still   further 

increased  until  fracture  takes  place,  and  the  load  which 
is  required  to  bring  about  rupture  is  noted.  This 
is  called  the  maximum  load,  or,  in  some  cases,  the 


AS  FOUND  FROM  THE  RESULTS  OF  TESTS          133 

ultimate  load.  The  yield  point  load  and  the  maximum 
load  are  divided  by  the  original  cross-sectional  area  of 
the  bar  to  obtain  the  yield  point  stress  and  the 
maximum  stress. 

This  last  result  is  generally  the  one  to  which  most  import- 
ance is  attached. 

4.  The   permanent   elongation   of   the   material,   as   measured 

upon  a  length  marked  on  the  bar  before  the  test,  is  also 
measured  and  noted.  This  may  be  upon  a  length  of  10 
ins.,  8  ins.,  or  any  other  length  down  to  2  ins.,  according  to 
the  size  of  the  bar.  The  result  is  given  as  a  percentage, 

5.  The  amount  the  cross-section  of  the  bar  has  been  reduced  is 

measured  at  the  point  of  fracture,  and  is  called  the 
reduction  or  contraction  of  area,  and  is  expressed  as  a 
percentage  of  the  original  area. 

Nos.  4  and  5  yield  information  as  to  the  ductility  of  the 
material. 

The  results  usually  required  in  specifications  and  by  inspectors 
of  material  are  :— 

The  yield  point  stress ; 
The  maximum  stress ;  and 

The  ductility,  as  indicated  by  the  permanent  elongation 
after  fracture. 

The  two  last  are  always  insisted  upon  in  tests  of  ductile 
material  such  as  wrought  iron,  mild  steel,  and  bronze.  The  yield 
point  stress  and  the  reduction  in  area  are  less  frequently  required. 

The  principal  forms  of  test  bars  used  for  ductile  materials  are 
indicated  by  the  sketches  on  Fig.  92. 

Here,  A  is  a  round  bar  whose  middle  portion  has  been  turned 

to  a  smaller  diameter. 
B  is  a  plain  round  or  square  bar. 
C  is  a  short  turned  specimen  with  screwed  ends,  such  as 

might  be  cut  out  of  a  large  forging. 
D  is  a  plate  or  flat  bar  specimen  with  the  middle  part 

milled  out  to  a  smaller  width. 
E  is  a  similar  bar  untouched. 


134  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

F  is  the  kind  of  specimen  used  for  cast  iron,  the  centre 
part  being  turned  and  the  ends  formed  to  fit  spherical 
dies. 


B 


FIG.  92. 

Testing  Machines.  —  The  essential  points  of  any  testing 
machine  for  carrying  out  the  tests  which  have  been  and  which 
will  be  mentioned,  are  : — 

(a)  Some  kind  of  device  for  holding  the  ends  of  the  specimen 
in  such  a  manner  that  they  cannot  be  pulled  away  by  the 
load  which  is  applied.  This  may  be  in  the  form  of  steel 
wedges  with  serrated  surfaces,  or  the  ends  of  the  bar 
may  be  screwed  so  as  to  fit  into  corresponding  sockets 
in  the  jaws  of  the  machine. 

(6)  There  must  be  some  way  of  applying  any  desired  load  to 
the  bar. 

(c)  The  last,  and  what  is  the  most  important  part  of  the 
machine,  is  the  arrangement  for  measuring  the  magnitude 
of  the  applied  load. 


AS  FOUND  FROM  THE  RESULTS  OF  TESTS 


135 


(d)  Ib  is  also  necessary  that  the  grips  at  one  end  of  the 
specimen  should  be  capable  of  being  moved  at  the  will 
of  the  experimenter,  so  as  to  enable  him  to  take  up  any 
stretch  which  may  occur  in  the  bar  during  the  test. 

A  skeleton  drawing  of  a  simple  form  of  testing  machine  is 
given  on  Fig.  93.  This  represents  the  vertical  type  made  by 
Messrs  Buckton  of  Leeds. 

Here  the  specimen  is  at  A  and  is  held  in  a  vertical  position,  its 
lower  end  being  attached  to  a  screw  by  means  of  which  it  is  pulled 
downwards  as  desired  and  a  tension  put  upon  the  bar.  The  upper 
end  of  the  specimen  is  connected  to  the  short  arm  oi  a  lever  or 


FIG.  93. 

steelyard  at  the  point  D ;  this  lever  turns  about  a  fulcrum  C,  its 
other  end  being  pulled  downwards  by  a  moving  weight  E.  The 
amount  of  the  tension  on  the  specimen  depends  upon  the  magni- 
tude of  the  weight  E,  and,  at  the  same  time,  upon  the  ratio  of  EC 
to  DC.  Most  machines  in  use  in  this  country  are  made  to  depend 
upon  this  plan  of  having  a  screw  or  hydraulic  device  by  which  the 
load  is  applied  and  a  weighing  lever  for  the  purpose  of  measuring 
this  load.  Where  it  is  desired  to  have  the  specimen  in  a  hori- 
zontal instead  of  a  vertical  position,  a  knee-lever  is  interposed 
between  the  weighing  lever  and  the  specimen. 

For  compression  the  links  suspended  from  D  are  fixed  to  a 


136  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

plate,  and  the  links  from  the  screw  are  attached  to  another  plate, 
this  being  pulled  downwards  by  the  screw  towards  the  first  plate, 
which  is  placed  below  it. 

In  another  type  of  testing  machine  which  is  coming  into 
use  in  this  country,  the  load  is  applied  by  the  pressure 
of  some  fluid  such  as  oil  acting  on  a  plunger  or  ram,  and  the 
magnitude  of  the  load  is  measured  by  the  pressure  of  the  fluid. 
So  long  as  there  is  no  appreciable  friction  in  the  ram,  this  fluid 
pressure  will  be  proportional  to  a  measure  of  the  load.  For  a 
more  detailed  description  of  the  several  forms  of  testing  machines 
the  reader  is  referred  to  one  of  the  books  which  deal  exclusively 
with  the  subject.* 

Appliances  for  Measuring  Elastic  Deformations. — Where 
measurements  for  the  purpose  of  calculating  Young's  Modulus 
have  to  be  made,  some  form  of  extensometer  must  be  applied  to  the 
specimen  under  observation.  The  mirror  instrument  devised  by 
Professor  Martens  of  Charlottenberg  has  already  been  described  in 
Chap.  VII. 

Besides  the  sketch  on  Fig.  61,  which  explains  the  principle  of 
action  of  the  Martens  mirror  apparatus,  views  are  given  on  Figs. 
94  and  95.f  These  are  taken  from  photographs  ^of  the  apparatus, 
when  actually  applied  to  a  vertical  bar.  The  bar  shown  here  is 
one  used  by  the  writer  for  the  purpose  of  explaining  the  action  of 
the  apparatus  to  students,  and  for  enabling  them  to  obtain  some 
little  practice  with  it  before  using  it  on  a  specimen  under  stress. 
It  is  made  telescopic,  so  that  its  total  length  can  be  varied  at  will 
by  simply  turning  the  milled  head  of  a  differential  screw.  The 
appliance  can  be  put  upon  any  table  or  convenient  stand,  and, 
besides  being  applicable  for  demonstration  purposes,  it  is  found 
extremely  useful  when  an  extensometer  is  to  be  calibrated  or 
tested,  or  when  two  extensometers  are  to  be  compared.  The 
mirrors  are  shown  more  in  detail  on  Fig.  96. 

There  are  two  measuring  bars,  one  on  the  surface  of  the  bar 
next  the  telescope,  and  the  other  on  the  surface  farther  from  it. 
By  adopting  this  arrangement  the  observer  can  see  how  the  stress 
varies  at  the  different  parts  of  the  section.  This  is  not  possible 

*  See  the  Author's  book  on  Testing  of  Materials,  published  by  the 
Scientific  Publishing  Co.,  Manchester. 

t  The  photographs  on  Figs.  94  arid  95  were  kindly  taken  in  the  photo- 
graphic department  of  the  Manchester  School  of  Technology. 


[Between  pp.  13G  and  137. 


AS  FOUND  FROM  THE  RESULTS  OF  TESTS          137 

with  most  extensometers,  where  only  the  average  strain  is 
measured  and  the  observer  cannot  tell  how  nearly  his  load  is 
being  applied  along  the  axis  of  the  specimen.  In  the  Martens 
mirror  apparatus  a  number  of  measuring  bars  are  usually  sup- 
plied of  different  lengths,  some  for  flat  and  some  for  rounded 
specimens. 

This  instrument  is  very  useful  in  that  it  can  be  just  as  readily 
applied  to  actual  parts  of  machines  or  structures  under  stress  as 
to  test  specimens.  On  Tig.  97  it  is  shown  when  being  used  for 
measuring  the  compressions  of  a  brickwork  pier. 

Its  fixing  and  adjustment  is  sometimes  a  little  tedious  at  first, 
but  when  once  set  it  is  found  to  give  extremely  good  results. 

Among  the  other  extensometers  in  use  in  this  country  is  that 
of  Ewing,  in  which  a  micrometer-microscope  is  combined  with  a 
lever;  and  the  simple  lever  instruments  of  the  Kennedy  type, 
where  the  change  in  length  of  the  specimen  moves  the  short  arm 
of  a  lever  with  a  high  velocity  ratio,  the  outer  end  of  the  long  arm 
carrying  a  pointer  which  moves  over  a  graduated  scale. 

Where  material  is  tested  under  a  compressive  stress,  it  is 
generally  necessary  to  bed  the  specimen  in  some  substance  such 
as  Portland  cement,  plaster  of  Paris,  lead,  or  millboard,  in  order 
to  distribute  the  stress  uniformly  over  the  surface.  This  is  found 
to  be  necessary  in  the  case  of  such  substances  as  stone,  brick, 
cement,  and  concrete ;  where  the  specimen  is  of  metal,  it  is  usually 
possible  to  machine  the  surface  so  as  to  get  a  flat  surface  to  rest 
against  the  compression  plates  of  the  machine. 

Besides  tensile  and  compressive  tests,  bending  or  cross-breaking 
tests  are  frequently  resorted  to.  These  are  used  in  the  case  of 
timber  beams,  iron  and  steel  girders,  rails,  and  so  forth. 

The  torsional  strength  of  small  shafts  can  be  found  experi- 
mentally by  applying  a  torsional  moment  in  a  special  machine ; 
and  direct  shearing  tests  are  also  carried  out  for  some  purposes. 

There  is  little  difficulty  in  determining  and  interpreting  the 
maximum  stress  of  materials  tested  to  destruction  and  the  elonga- 
tion and  reduction  after  fracture,  but  it  is  found  that,  as  regards 
the  limits  of  elasticity,  there  is  sometimes  considerable  ambiguity ; 
this  point  will  be  discussed  in  the  following  chapter. 


CHAPTEE    XIV 

THE   LIMITS    OF   ELASTICITY 

IT  has  already  been  pointed  out  that  when  a  bar  is  loaded  it  is 
altered  in  length,  and  that  if  when  the  load  is  taken  off  the  bar 
returns  to  its  original  dimensions,  it  is  said  to  be  perfectly  elastic. 
It  has  further  been  shown  that  as  the  loading  is  increased,  there 
comes  a  point  beyond  which  the  change  in  length  is  partly 
temporary  and  partly  permanent,  and  that  the  stress  at  which 
this  begins  to  take  place  is  the  elastic  limit  of  the  material.  This 
is  the  simplest,  and  in  many  ways  the  most  scientific  description 
of  the  elastic  limit ;  but,  as  will  be  seen,  there  are  great  difficulties 
in  the  way  of  determining  this  point,  and  its  very  existence 
depends  upon  the  precision  of  the  instruments  used  in  its  deter- 
mination. 

Limit  of  Proportionality. — It  is  found  from  experiment  that 
the  proportionality  between  load  and  deformation  or  stress  and 
strain  exists  until  a  stress  is  reached  beyond  which  the  strains 
begin  to  increase  for  equal  increments  of  stress.  Take  the  case  of 
a  bar  under  tension  in  a  testing  machine :  the  loads  are  applied  so 
much  at  a  time,  the  increase  being  the  same  at  every  step.  Means 
are  taken  for  measuring  the  small  extensions  accompanying  the 
tension  stresses,  and  it  is  found  that  for  every  equal  increase  of 
load  a  correspondingly  equal  increase  of  length  takes  place.  This 
goes  on  until  a  certain  load  is  reached,  beyond  which  the  incre- 
ments of  stretch  are  no  longer  equal,  but  continually  increase. 
This  point  has  been  given  the  name  of  limit  of  proportionality,  or 
P-limit.  This  term  clearly  defines  its  own  meaning,  and  could 
not  be  improved  upon,  but,  possibly  with  some  reason,  it  has  often 
been  called  the  elastic  limit. 

So  far,  it  is  seen  that  there  are  two  ways  in  which  the  elastic  limit 
stress  may  be  denned — viz.,  as  the  point  beyond  which  permanent 

138 


THE  LIMITS  OF  ELASTICITY  139 

set  is  given  to  the  bar,  and  otherwise  as  the  stress  beyond  which 
the  strain  is  no  longer  proportional  to  the  stress.  If  these  two 
points  were  found  to  coincide,  there  would  be  no  difficulty  about 
the  elastic  limit ;  but,  unfortunately,  it  is  usually  found  that  the 
first  permanent  set  takes  place  at  a  stress  below  that  at  which 
proportionality  appears  to  cease.  It  is  therefore  necessary  to 
clearly  distinguish  between  these  two  ;  they  are  so  often  confused, 
and  hastily  assumed  to  be  one  and  the  same  point.  If  the  original 
term,  elastic  limit,  is  retained  for  the  first — and  that  would  seem  to 
be  the  most  reasonable  course  to  adopt — then  the  second  can  still 
be  called  P-limit. 

It  has  been  said  that,  using  the  most  precise  and  accurate 
measuring  instruments  at  present  constructed,  the  elastic  limit  is 
found  to  lie  below  the  P-limit ;  but  the  opinion  is  strongly  held 
by  some  authorities — notably  M.  Fremont — that  the  elastic  limit 
and  the  P-limit  are  coincident,  and  that  it  is  only  want  of 
accuracy  and  precision  in  our  measuring  instruments  which  makes 
it  appear  that  they  occupy  distinctly  different  positions. 

In  his  investigations  into  the  position  of  the  elastic  limit 
of  metals,  M.  Fremont  has  adopted  the  method  of  using  a  micro- 
scope to  examine  the  polished  surface  of  the  metal  under  stress 
and  has  taken  as  the  elastic  limit  a  point  at  which  a  slight  dulling 
of  the  surface  is  shown  by  the  microscope ;  and  he  maintains  that 
this  is  the  only  true  elastic  limit.  In  the  course  of  his  examina- 
tion he  found  that  this  limit  only  appeared  at  first  in  one  or  more 
isolated  spots,  until  the  change  gradually  covered  the  whole  of 
the  surface ;  and  in  order  to  overcome  the  difficulty  of  noting  the 
first  appearance  he  used  bars  of  gradually  varying  section,  in 
which  there  was  one  small  part  where  the  stress  was  always 
greatest,  and  at  which  the  appearance  would  change  as  soon  as 
the  stress  at  the  smallest  area  reached  the  elastic  limit  stress. 

As  a  result  of  these  investigations  of  M.  Fremont,  a  third  and 
new  definition  of  the  elastic  limit  is  created,  which  only  tends  to 
add  to  the  already  existing  confusion  as  to  what  really  fixes 
this  point. 

Besides  these,  there  have  at  different  times  been  other  attempts 
to  solve  the  difficulty.  Of  these,  Styffe  wanted  to  fix  the  limit 
as  a  point  which  was  made  to  depend  on  the  increase  of  per- 
manent strain  as  depending  on  the  rate  of  increase  of  stress. 
By  this  method  a  point  is  obtained  for  the  limit  which  lies  above 


140  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

the  P-limit.  In  a  similar  manner  Wertheim  attempted  to  fix 
the  limit  as  a  stress  where  the  permanent  strain  was  a  definite 
fraction  of  the  original  length  of  the  specimen,  namely  o0o00. 
There  are  many  objections  to  this  plan,  chiefly  on  account  of  the 
delicacy  of  the  operation  and  the  great  care  required  in  carrying 
it  out,  and  also  because  only  part  of  this  apparently  permanent 
strain  is  really  permanent,  the  remaining  portion  disappearing 
after  the  bar  has  rested  for  a  time. 

Yield  Point. — The  five  points  which  have  been  mentioned  as 
elastic  limits  are  all  more  or  less  entitled  to  some  claim  on  the 
term,  but  this  does  not  apply  to  the  point  so  often  mentioned 
in  commercial  tests  as  the  elastic  limit,  but  which  is  really  the 
yield  point.  This  is  the  stress,  readily  found,  where  the  strain 
rapidly  increases  in  amount  as  the  load  is  slowly  increased  or 
is  stationary,  and  is  clearly  discernible  by  means  of  compass 
measurements  and  by  the  appearance  of  the  surface  of  the  bar. 
The  various  ways  of  fixing  this  point  include  the  dropping  of 
the  testing-machine  beam  on  to  its  bottom  stop,  advocated  by 
Kennedy;  the  change  in  the  appearance  of  the  surface  of  the 
bar  recommended  by  Styffe ;  the  perceptible  thickening  of  a  line 
inscribed  on  the  bar  by  a  pair  of  compasses,  which  method  is 
used  by  many  experimenters  in  this  country;  and  the  employ- 
ment of  an  autographic  diagram,  also  much  used  and  recom- 
mended by  Unwin.  A  way  of  finding  the  yield  point  which  the 
author  has  often  employed  is  to  use  an  extensometer  and  note 
the  load  at  which  the  pointer  or  cross -wire  begins  to  creep 
quickly  along  the  scale  without  any  increase  in  load.  This, 
though  probably  the  most  reliable  method,  is  somewhat  elaborate, 
and  requires  more  time  than  can  be  spared  in  ordinary  commercial 
testing  operations. 

Illustrations  of  the  Three  Limits. — It  will  be  well  here  to 
inspect  one  or  two  diagrams  which  serve  to  illustrate  what  has 
been  said  regarding  the  several  points  which  have  been  men- 
tioned as  elastic  limits. 

The  curves  on  Fig.  98  have  been  plotted  from  the  results  of  a 
tension  test  on  a  turned  bar  of  wrought  iron,  the  measurements 
of  extension  being  taken  with  a  Martens  mirror  extensometer 
capable  of  reading  directly  to  To-o-oo-th  of  an  inch,  and  by 
estimation  to  50^00th  of  an  inch.  The  extensions  were 
measured  on  a  10  cm.  length  of  the  bar. 


THE  LIMITS  OF  ELASTICITY 


141 


The  wrought  iron  bar  in  question  was  put  into  the  testing 
machine,  and  loads  applied  by  increments  of  2  tons.  Before 
each  new  load  was  applied  the  load  was  removed,  and  the 
readings  on  the  extensometer  scales,  if  any,  taken.  In  this  way 
it  was  possible  to  determine  the  point  at  which  the  reading  line 
did  not  return  to  zero  after  loading — the  reading  at  zero  load 


A 


BACK 


FRONT. 


O  O-OOOI         O-OOO2      O-OOO3       O-OOO4 

PERMANENT     SET-INCHES 


FIG.    1.  —  BAR   OF    WROUGHT    IRON    IN    TENSION. 
IJIAM.,    1'62    IN.       MEASURED    LENGTH,    4    INS. 


FIG.   98. 


giving  the  permanent  set  produced  by  the  last  loading.  By  doing 
this,  it  was  possible  to  determine,  with  a  fair  degree  of  accuracy, 
at  what  load  the  bar  first  began  to  take  permanent  set. 

The  curves  on  Fig.  98  represent  the  permanent  set  for  each 
increment  of  2  tons  up  to  22  tons  load.  Here  loads  are  plotted 
vertically  and  extensions  horizontally.  It  will  be  se*en  that  until 
about  12  tons  have  been  reached  there  is  no  permanent  set,  the 
reading  line  of  the  extensometer  coming  back  to  zero  after  each 


142 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


loading.  At  this  load  a  permanent  set  is  first  noticed,  and 
increases  for  each  successive  load.  The  two  curves  represent  the 
readings  on  the  two  sides  of  the  bar,  one  being  marked  on  the 
diagram  as  "  back,"  the  other  as  "  front."  It  will  be  seen  that  the 
permanent  set,  besides  commencing  at  a  definite  point,  increases 
by  regular  amounts,  and  also  that  this  increase  is  more  rapid 
on  the  front  of  the  bar  than  on  the  back.  From  this  it  is 
gathered  that  the  bar  is  not  held  evenly  in  the  grips,  so  that  the 
line  of  pull  lies  between  the  axis  of  the  bar  and  its  front  side, 
causing  the  stress  on  this  side  to  be  greater  than  at  the  back. 


25 


20 


O'OOOl       O  OOO2      O-OOO.3    INCHES. 


15 


o 


"PT 


INCHES 


O-OOI 


0-002 


0-003 


Fig.  99. 

The  point  where  the  lines  first  leave  the  vertical  zero  line  is 
marked  on  the  diagram  E.L.,  being  the  load  at  which  the  elastic 
limit,  as  above  defined,  has  been  reached. 

Now  look  at  Fig.  99.  This  refers  to  the  same  test  as  the 
last.  Two  curves  have  been  plotted,  the  upper  marked  "P.S. 
mean,"  and  is  an  average  of  the  two  plotted  on  Fig.  98,  again 
showing  the  elastic  limit.  On  the  other  curve  have  been  plotted 
the  total  average  extensions.  It  will  be  seen  that  up  to  a  certain 
load  the  points  of  the  curve  fall  on  a  perfectly  straight  line,  thus 
indicating  true  proportionality  between  load  and  extension,  or 


THE  LIMITS  OF  ELASTICITY  143 

between  stress  and  strain.  This  point  where  the  curve  leaves 
the  straight  and  begins  to  turn  slightly  towards  the  right,  is 
marked  P.L.,  indicating  the  P-limit,  or  limit  of  proportionality. 
This  point  occurs  at  a  load  higher  than  the  elastic  limit  just 
found. 

This  illustrates  what  has  previously  been  said  about  the 
relative  positions  of  the  elastic  limit  and  the  P-limit,  namely,  that 
the  latter  is  found  to  be  higher  than  the  former ;  but  it  is  quite 
conceivable  that,  as  M.  Fremont  considers  likely,  these  two  points 
really  coincide,  and  would  be  found  to  coincide  if  the  measurements 
of  strains  could  be  made  with  greater  precision  than  is  now  the 
case.  The  way  in  which  the  proportionality  limit  is  usually  found, 
and  this  is  probably  the  most  reliable  way,  is  to  measure  the 
strains  corresponding  to  known  stresses,  and  plot  one  against  the 
other  to  a  fairly  large  scale  on  true  squared  paper.  A  straight- 
edge is  then  laid  along  the  series  of  points  so  obtained.  It  will 
be  found  that  the  straight-edge  can  be  made  to  coincide  with  the 
earlier  part  of  the  series  of  points,  and  it  is  clearly  seen  where  the 
line  begins  to  leave  the  straight.  It  would  seem  that  this  point 
of  departure  ought  to  occur  precisely  at  the  same  load  as  that  at 
which  it  was  first  found  that  there  was  any  permanent  set,  and 
that  the  more  nearly  they  would  so  coincide,  the  more  precise  were 
the  strain  measurements  and  the  larger  and  more  accurate  the 
plotting.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  it  is  found  to  be  difficult,  with 
specimens  of  the  ordinary  sizes,  even  when  estimating  to  fifty- 
thousandths  of  an  inch,  to  make  the  increments  of  strain  quite 
uniform.  It  is  also  difficult  to  obtain  perfect  uniformity  in  the 
increments  of  the  load,  and  this  leads  to  small  unevennesses 
in  the  strains,  apart  from  the  intrinsic  want  of  precision  in  their 
own  readings.  Taking  all  these  considerations  into  account,  the 
writer  believes  that  the  elastic  limit  ought  to  coincide  with  the 
P-limit.  Whether  greater  precision  in  measuring  would  fix  the 
elastic  limit  more  accurately  is  open  to  doubt  when  the  form  of 
the  set  curve  is  examined :  the  curve  appears  to  run  into  the  line 
of  zero  strains  at  a  definite  angle,  and  not  to  approach  it  as  to  a 
tangent. 

Next,  referring  to  Fig.  100,  it  will  be  found  that  a  stress  strain 
diagram  has  been  plotted  which  shows  the  P-limit  and  the  yield 
point  for  the  same  bar.  In  this  case  the  extensions  were  taken 
with  a  Ewing  extensometer  on  1J  ins.  of  a  tension  specimen  of 


144 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


high-carbon  steel  f  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  The  diagram  forms  a 
straight  line  up  to  the  proportionality  limit,  which  is  shown  at 
4  tons,  corresponding  to  13'06  tons  per  sq.  in.  Beyond  this  point 
the  line  diverges  from  the  straight,  curves  more  and  more  rapidly 
towards  the  right,  and  eventually  becomes  horizontal,  in  this  way 
showing  a  rapid  increase  of  length  without  any  increase  in  load. 
This  is  the  yield  point,  and  is  marked  at  6  tons,  or  19 '74  tons  per 
sq.  in.  on  the  diagram.  It  may  be  added  that  the  maximum 
strength  of  this  specimen  was  found  to  be  about  4*7  tons  per  sq.  in. 


7* 


.._/L.. 


S. 


RL 


NCHE.S.       0-001 


0-002 


FIG.  100. 

To  anyone  who  is  observing  the  extensometer  readings,  this  yield 
point  is  determined  with  great  certainty  by  noting  when  the 
reading  line  begins  to  creep  rapidly  along  the  scale  without  any 
increase  in  the  load.  It  is  not  necessary  to  take  a  series  of 
observations,  but  simply  to  watch  the  scale  as  the  load  is  being 
gradually  increased,  and  it  is  at  once  seen  when  the  creeping 
begins.  As  already  pointed  out,  for  commercial  purposes  the  use 
of  an  extensometer  is  generally  found  to  occupy  too  much  time, 
and  the  yield  point  is  more  usually  found  by  using  a  pair  of 
dividers  or  watching  the  drop  of  the  beam,  though  the  latter  is 


THE  LIMITS  OF  ELASTICITY 


145 


apt  to  be  misleading  in  some  cases.  Another  plan  which  has 
been  mentioned  is  to  let  the  bar  tell  its  own  tale  by  drawing 
an  autographic  diagram.  Three  such  diagrams  are  shown  on 
Fig.  101,  the  yield  point  being  indicated  in  each  case.  In  the 
curve  taken  from  a  mild  steel  bar  (a),  the  position  of  the  point 
is  unmistakable,  and  is  shown  by  the  distinct  horizontal  jump  in 
the  curve  where  yielding  takes  place.  It  is  to  be  noticed  that 
the  early  part  of  this  step  is  similar  to  the  curved  part  of  the 
diagram  on  Fig.  100,  but  drawn  to  a  much  smaller  horizontal  scale  ; 
the  portion  referred  to  is  lettered  (I)  (m)  in  both  diagrams. 


E  X   T   E   N  5  I  ONS 


FIG.   101. 

The  second  of  these  curves,  (b),  has  a  much  less  distinctly 
marked  yield  point,  and  the  third  one,  (c),  for  a  bar  of  wrought 
iron,  is  even  worse.  In  cases  like  the  last,  the  autographic  diagram 
is  apt  to  fail  as  a  means  of  locating  the  yield  point,  unless  great 
care  is  used  in  manipulating  the  apparatus  and  it  is  in  the  hands 
of  a  very  experienced  observer.  In  any  case,  the  actual  quanti- 
tative value  of  the  yield  point  load  should  not  be  scaled  from  the 
diagram,  but  read  off  on  the  scale  of  the  machine  as  soon  as  it  is 
seen  that  the  pencil  is  leaving  the  elastic  line. 

The  writer  has  tried  having  three  observers  watching  for  the 


146 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


yield  point  on  the  same  test.  One  used  an  extensometer,  the  second 
tried  the  measured  length  of  the  bar  with  a  pair  of  dividers,  while 
the  third  watched  for  the  drop  of  the  beam.  It  was  found  that 
the  extensometer  man  noted  the  point  first,  the  dropping  of  the 
beam  came  second,  and  the  dividers  were  last. 

Unsymmetrical  Loading. — It  has  already  been  pointed  out 
that  in  very  many  cases  the  bar  under  test  is  loaded  unsymmetri- 
cally,  with  the  result  that  there  is  a  greater  stress  on  one  side 
than  on  the  other.  The  curves  of  extension  for  the  two  sides  of 


30 


20 


10 


INCHES  o  001         o«oo2     o-oo3      o-oo4 


FIG.  102. 

such  an  unequally  loaded  bar  are  shown  in  Fig.  102;  this  refers 
to  a  cast  steel  round  bar,  rather  more  than  2  sq.  ins.  in  area.  It  will 
be  seen  that  the  two  limits  are  not  very  far  apart,  that  on  the  right- 
hand  diagram  occurring  slightly  earlier  than  in  the  case  of  the 
other.  As  the  extensions,  and  consequently  the  stresses,  of  the 
right-hand  side  are  greater  than  those  for  the  left,  as  shown  by 
the  greater  slope  of  the  curve,  the  proportionality  limit  will  occur 
first  here.  The  effect  of  this  slight  yielding  appears  to  throw  the 


THE  LIMITS  OF  ELASTICITY  147 

load  nearer  the  other  side  and  bring  the  stress  to  a  more  nearly 
uniform  condition,  so  that  the  proportionality  limit  is  reached  on 
the  left  side  almost  as  soon  as  on  the  right.  This  approach  to 
uniformity  is  shown  on  the  diagram  by  the  fact  that  the  two 
dotted  lines  are  nearly  parallel.  This  would  appear  to  show  that 
where  the  loading  is  slightly  eccentric,  the  general  P-limit  will 
only  be  very  little  in  excess  of  the  same  point  for  the  more  greatly 
stressed  portion  of  the  bar. 

The  above  are  only  isolated  examples  taken  from  a  large 
number  of  similar  experiments. 

Changes  of  Limit  by  Previous  Loading. — In  what  has  been 
said  so  far,  it  has  been  assumed  that  the  limit,  whether  elastic 
limit,  P-limit,  or  yield  point,  is  a  fixed  point  for  a  given  material ; 
but  this  only  so  long  as  the  material  is  always  in  precisely  the 
same  condition. 

It  is  well  known  that  if  the  P-limit  has  been  found  for  a  bar 
under  a  tension  load,  and  the  load  is  raised  to  a  point  somewhat 
in  excess  of  the  limit  just  determined,  then  on  reloading  the  bar 
with  the  intention  of  finding  the  limit  a  second  time,  this  will  now 
be  found  to  be  at  a  higher  stress,  not  far  from  the  maximum  stress 
applied  in  the  first  loading.  In  other  words,  the  limit  will  have 
been  raised  by  this  previous  loading,  and  not  only  so,  but  it  may 
be  raised  time  after  time  with  successive  loadings.  Moreover, 
these  artificially  raised  limits  can  be  made  to  again  fall  to  some- 
where near  the  original  point  in  several  ways,  such  as  resting  for 
a  time,  by  the  application  of  heat,  or  by  hammering.  If,  however, 
the  bar  has  been  previously  loaded  beyond  the  limit  in  tension, 
then  the  loading  is  reversed  and  the  stress  is  carried  beyond  the 
limit  in  compression ;  it  will  be  found  that  on  now  reloading  in 
tension,  the  limit,  instead  of  having  been  raised  by  the  previous 
loading,  will  have  been  depressed.  This  appears  to  lead  to  the 
conclusion  that  the  effect  of  previous  loading  beyond  the  limit  is 
to  raise  the  limit  for  loading  in  the  same  direction,  and  to  depress 
it  by  loading  with  the  same  stress  in  the  opposite  direction,  all 
these  being  artificially  produced  limits.  Further,  it  is  found  that 
while  an  artificially  raised  limit  is  lowered  by  a  reversed  loading, 
an  artificially  depressed  limit  is  raised  by  a  reverse  loading.  The 
result  is  that  after  a  series  of  reversed  loadings,  carried  in  each 
case  just  beyond  the  limit,  the  limit  settles  down  to  a  fixed  value 
which  is  the  same  for  compression  as  for  tension ;  this  point  has 


148  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

been  styled  the  natural  limit  for  the  material.  The  limit  found 
on  the  first  loading  of  the  bar  is  generally  higher  than  the  natural 
limit,  and  has  probably  been  artificially  formed  in  the  process  of 
manufacture  or  by  after-treatment.  It  has  been  found  that  bars 
return  to  their  primitive  limit  after  resting  for  a  few  weeks  or 
months,  or  more  quickly  by  the  application  of  a  temperature  such 
as  that  of  boiling  water,  or  by  hammering. 

Looking  back  at  what  has  just  been  said,  it  will  be  seen  that 
there  are  really  two  well-defined  limits  found  during  the  loading 
of  a  bar  of  iron  or  steel  in  tension.  These  may  be  called  the  limit 
of  proportionality  (or  P-limit)  and  the  yield  point.  The  former  of 
these  is  less  easy  to  determine  than  the  second,  and  its  exact 
location  partly  depends  on  the  precision  of  the  measuring  instru- 
ments used  in  its  determination,  and  in  all  probability  it  coincides 
with  the  true  elastic  limit.  It  may  safely  be  said  that  whenever 
the  elastic  limit  is  spoken  of  in  connection  with  a  commercial  test, 
what  is  really  meant  is  the  yield  point.  Of  course,  if  it  is 
generally  agreed  to  call  this  point  the  elastic  limit,  well  and  good, 
but  this  should  be  clearly  stated,  and  the  existing  ambiguity 
removed  once  for  all.  The  objections  to  this  use  of  the  term  will 
be  gathered  from  what  has  been  said  above;  and,  in  addition,  it 
is  well  known  that  many  of  the  high-carbon  steels  show  no 
yield  point,  and  a  limit  can  only  be  determined  by  using  instru- 
ments of  precision. 

Besides  defining  what  is  meant  by  the  limit  given  in  com- 
mercial tests,  it  would  be  well  if  the  manner  of  finding  it  could 
be  clearly  defined,  and  one  standard  method  adopted.  This  would 
lead  to  uniformity,  and  enable  useful  comparisons  to  be  made. 

And  lastly,  where  the  limit  given  is  to  be  in  any  sense  used  as 
a  criterion  of  the  quality  of  the  metal,  not  only  should  the  nature 
of  the  limit  and  its  manner  of  determination  be  clearly  understood, 
but  the  history  of  the  test  specimen  should  be  known  as  regards 
its  treatment  between  leaving  the  rolls  and  being  tested. 

The  greater  part  of  the  matter  in  the  above  chapter*  is  taken  by 
permission  from  the  author's  article  in  the  Engineering  Review,  April, 
1904. 


CHAPTEE    XV 

THE  MATERIALS  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION 

THE  materials  of   engineering   naturally  divide  themselves  into 
three  chief  classes,  namely : 

1.  Metals,  of  which  the  most  important  are. the  several  alloys  of 

iron,  copper,  and  steel. 

2.  Vitreous  materials,  including  stones  of  various  kinds,  brick 

and  terra-cotta,  lirne,  cement,  mortar,  and  concrete. 

3.  Materials  which  do  not  come  under  the  above, heads,  such  as 

timber,  ropes,  belting,  and  others  of  minor  importance. 

The  above  will  be  taken  in  the  order  given,  and  their  chief 
strength  properties,  so  far  as  they  affect  the  engineer,  will  be 
briefly  discussed. 

Iron  and  Steel. 

The  metal  Iron,  alloyed  with  greater  or  lesser  quantities  of 
other  elementary  substances  and  containing  various  impurities, 
goes  to  form  what  are  now  among  the  most  useful  and  important 
materials  employed  by  the  engineer. 

There  are  a  great  number  of  these  alloys  of  iron,  ranging  from 
the  softest  kind  of  wrought  iron  to  the  hardest  steel,  but  they 
may  be  roughly  classed  under  the  following  heads  : — 

Wrought  Iron, 
Mild  or  Low-carbon  Steels, 
Medium  Steels, 
High-carbon  Steels, 
Cast  Iron. 

The  above  are  placed  in  the  order  of  their  percentage  of 
carbon,  wrought  iron  containing  the  lowest  and  cast  iron  the 

149 


150  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

highest.  In  preparing  any  of  these  varieties  of  iron,  the 
material  operated  upon  is  pig-iron,  the  relatively  crude  form  of 
iron  which  is  obtained  from  >the  smelting  of  the  ore.  As  the 
strength  properties  of  these  materials  depend  to  a  very  large 
extent  on  the  processes  of  manufacture,  as  well  as  upon  the 
ingredients  which  are  alloyed  or  mixed  with  the  iron,  the  methods 
used  in  the  principal  operations  will  be  very  briefly  indicated. 

In  addition  to  other  impurities,  the  pig-iron  of  commerce 
contains  carbon  (2J  to  5  per  cent.),  silicon,  and  manganese. 
Wrought  iron,  on  the  other  hand,  contains  little  more  than  traces 
of  these,  so  that  the  process  in  which  wrought  iron  is  prepared 
from  pig  consists  essentially  in  burning  the  alloyed  metals  out 
of  the  iron,  and  leaving  what  is  approximately  pure  iron.  In 
the  puddling  process,  by  which  much  of  the  wrought  iron 
is  made,  the  pig-iron  is  brought  to  a  molten  condition  and 
exposed  to  the  action  of  a  decarburising  or  oxidising  flame  in 
a  reverberatory  furnace.  After  a  time  the  carbon,  silicon,  and 
manganese  are  burnt  out  of  the  mass,  which  has  now  become 
thick  and  sticky.  This  is  worked  up  into  a  ball  and  placed 
between  squeezers  to  get  rid  of  the  iron  oxide  or  scale,  and  the 
billet  so  obtained  is  afterwards  rolled  into  plates  and  bars.  The 
rolling  does  not  take  place  in  one  process,  but  is  repeated  in  a 
series  of  operations.  That  is  to  say,  in  rolling  bar  iron,  a  number 
of  the  bars  rolled  from  the  original  billet  are  bundled  together, 
heated,  and  again  rolled  out  into  a  single  bar.  This  treatment 
results  in  the  fibrous  and  laminated  appearance  seen  in  the 
fracture  of  a  test  specimen  of  wrought  iron. 

The  result  of  the  process  of  manufacture  of  wrought  iron  from 
pig  is  to  get  rid  of  almost  all  the  carbon,  as  well  as  the  greater 
part  of  all  the  other  ingredients,  leaving  little  more  than  traces 
of  carbon,  silicon,  manganese,  sulphur,  phosphorus,  and  copper. 
The  three  last  exist  only  as  undesirable  impurities. 

The  material  having  this  composition,  as  produced  by  the 
puddling  or  the  crucible  process,  and  afterwards  treated  by 
hammering  and  rolling,  is  known  as  wrought  iron,  and  has  the 
following  distinguishing  qualities : — It  is  soft,  tough,  ductile,  and 
fibrous  in  structure ;  it  is  equally  strong  in  tension  and  in  com- 
pression ;  it  is  capable  of  being  easily  pressed  and  hammered  into 
various  shapes  when  it  has  been  softened  by  being  brought  to 
a  red  heat,  and  less  readily  when  cold ;  two  or  more  pieces  can 


THE  MATERIALS  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION          151 

be  welded  into  one  by  hammering  at  a  white  heat ;  it  is  only  at 
very  high  temperatures  that  wrought  iron  is  reduced  to  a  fluid 
state,  thus  rendering  it  unsuitable  for  castings ;  and,  lastly,  unlike 
the  hard  steels,  it  cannot  be  hardened  by  heating  and  quenching. 

Of  the  ingredients  included  in  wrought  iron,  carbon  is 
generally  less  than  010  per  cent.,  often  as  low  as  0'03  per  cent, 
and  occasionally  as  high  as  019  per  cent. ;  of  manganese  there 
is  little  more  than  a  trace;  the  silicon  varies  from  a  trace  to 
013  per  cent. ;  the  sulphur  varies  from  nothing  to  0'025  per 
cent. ;  and  there  is  of  phosphorus  0'02  to  0'20  per  cent. 

The  effect  of  a  deleterious  quantity  of  phosphorus  is  to  cause 
metal  to  be  cold  short,  or  to  show  a  want  of  ductility  when 
worked  cold,  and  in  a  like  manner  sulphur  and  copper  produce 
the  same  effect  when  the  iron  is  being  worked  at  a  red  heat,  or 
makes  it  red  short. 

When  tested  under  a  tensile  load  it  is  found  that  the  yield 
point  of  wrought  iron  is  from  12  to  17  tons  per  sq.  in.,  and  the 
maximum  stress  is  from  19  to  25  tons  per  sq.  in.  A  good  average 
value  for  the  maximum  stress  is  23  tons  per  sq.  in.  The  elonga- 
tion after  fracture  varies  from  10  to  30  per  cent,  and  the  reduction 
in  area  from  10  to  50  per  cent.  The  appearance  of  the  fracture 
should  be  fibrous,  without  showing  too  much  lamination.  A  test 
bar  broken  under  a  steady  load  should  not  show  a  crystalline 
fracture. 

In  compression  there  is  no  maximum,  as  squeezing  of  the 
material  can  go  on  indefinitely.  The  definite  point  to  be  n^ted 
in  the  loading  is  the  yield  point,  and  this  occurs  at  about  the 
same  stress  as  for  the  same  material  in  tension. 

The  shearing  strength  is  found  to  be  from  75  to  85  per  cent, 
of  the  tensile.  A  common  value  for  this  ratio  used  in  design  is 
80  per  cent.,  or  four-fifths. 

The  elastic  modulus  for  wrought  iron  is  in  the  neighbourhood 
of  27,000,000  to  29,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

It  is  found  that  wrought  iron  attains  its  maximum  strength  at 
a  temperature  of  from  500°  to  600°  F. ;  after  this  temperature  has 
been  reached  the  strength  falls  off  rapidly. 

A  typical  stress  strain  diagram  for  wrought  iron  is  shown  on 
Fig.  103. 

Steel. — Steel  is  iron  containing  from  0*05  to  T50  per  cent,  of 
alloyed  carbon,  with  the  addition  of  small  quantities  of  manganese, 


152 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


silicon,  sulphur,  and  phosphorus.  The  composition  of  low- 
carbon  steel,  used  for  such  purposes  as  structural  work  and 
boilers,  is  somewhat  as  follows: — 

Carbon       .  .         0170  to  0'275  per  cent. 

Silicon      V  .         0-020  „  0'090 

Manganese  .         0'050  „  0700 

Sulphur     .  -          .         0-010  „  0-040 

Phosphorus  .         O'OIO  „  0'050 


40 


10 


HS 


MNS 


10 


20 


30 


PERCENTAGE    ELONGATION. 

FIG.  103. — Here  CI  refers  to  cast  iron  ;  WI,  wrought  iron  ;  MS,  mild  steel; 
MMS,  medium  steel ;  HS,  high-carbon  steel. 

The  Low-Carbon  Steels  are  prepared  from  pig-iron,  either  by 
burning  out  the  carbon  and  silicon  and  putting  back  sufficient 
carbon  to  give  it  the  requisite  qualities,  as  in  the  Bessemer  pro- 
cess, or  by  melting  pig-iron  containing  too  large  a  proportion  of 
carbon  with  a  second  ingredient  which  contains  less  carbon,  such 
as  scrap  wrought  iron  or  haematite  iron  ore,  in  such  propor- 


THE  MATERIALS  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION          153 

tions  that  the  resulting  material  contains  just  the  right  percentage 
of  carbon :  this  is  what  is  done  in  the  Siemens  and  Siemens- 
Martin  open  hearth  processes.  In  all  these  methods  the  metal  so 
produced  is  run  into  moulds  so  as  to  obtain  ingots  or  slabs  of  the 
steel,  and  these  are  afterwards  hammered  and  rolled  into  the 
desired  bars  or  plates  or  section  bars. 

The  general  properties  of  the  low-carbon  or  mild  steels  so 
produced  are  similar  to  those  of  wrought  iron,  with  one  or  two 
modifications.  The  strength  properties  are  higher,  both  as  regards 
the  yield  point  and  maximum  strength,  and  also  the  ductility  as 
given  by  the  elongation  and  reduction;  the  appearance  of  the 
fracture,  instead  of  being  fibrous,  should  have  a  fine  silky  or 
velvety  appearance. 

The  yield  point  when  under  tensile  stress  varies  from  13  to  22 
tons  per  sq.  in.,  and  the  maximum  stress  from  25  to  32  tons  per 
sq.  in.,  while  the  elongation  is  from  20  to  30  per  cent.,  and  the 
reduction  in  area  from  40  to  60  per  cent. 

Like  wrought  iron,  the  compressive  yield  point  stress  of  mild 
steel  is  the  same  as  that  in  tension ;  and  the  shear  strength  is 
about  four-fifths  of  the  tensile. 

Young's  modulus  generally  falls  between  28,000,000  and 
30,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

The  maximum  tensile  strength  occurs  at  500°  or  600°  F. 

A  typical  stress  diagram  is  given  on  Fig.  103. 

Medium  Steels. — In  what  are  known  as  the  medium  steels 
the  percentage  of  carbon  is  higher,  the  strengths  are  higher,  and 
the  ductility  somewhat  less.  These  medium  steels  cover  a  con- 
siderable range  as  regards  their  strength  properties.  They  are 
made  by  both  the  open  hearth  and  Bessemer  processes,  and  have 
the  following  compositions  : — 

Composition  of  Medium  Steels, 
Carbon     -  /.  ,.        0*300  to  0450  per  cent. 

Silicon        .  .         0-050  „  O'OGO 

Manganese  .         0450  „  O'GOO 

Sulphur      .         - :  i   .      0-020  „  0'040 
Phosphorus         fVl.        0'030  „  0'070 

These  medium  steels  are  used  for  such  purposes  as  engine 
forgings,  piston  rods,  wheel  tyres,  rails,  and  any  similar  purposes 


154  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

where  a  steel  is  required  which  is  not  very  hard,  but  which  is 
harder  and  stronger  than  ordinary  low-carbon  structural  steel. 

The  yield  point  stress  in  tension  of  the  medium  steels  varies 
from  14  to  22  tons  per  sq.  in.,  and  the  maximum  stress  from  32 
to  44  tons  per  sq.  in. ;  while  the  elongation  is  from  12  to  20  per 
cent.  The  compressive  and  shearing  strengths  follow  the  same 
law  as  in  rnild  steel.  While  the  elastic  modulus  is  very  little 
higher,  rarely  being  very  far  from  30,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  general  properties  of  the  medium 
steels  are  similar  to  those  of  the  low- carbon  steels,  but  in  advance 
of  them  in  the  same  way  as  mild  steel  is  in  advance  of  wrought 
iron. 

High-Carbon  or  Hard  Steels. — The  percentage  of  carbon 
present  in  these  steels  varies  from  0*45  per  cent,  to  1*50  per  cent., 
and  for  some  special  purposes  is  still  higher.  Under  this  heading 
are  included  many  varieties  of  steel  produced  in  a  number  of 
ways  and  used  for  purposes  where  either  great  strength  or  great 
hardness  is  required.  They  include  hard  steel  for  forgings,  steel 
for  guns,  springs,  and  every  kind  of  cutting  tool.  In  many  of  the 
purposes  for  which  hard  steel  is  used,  it  is  necessary  not  only  to 
have  strength  and  hardness,  but  to  be  able  to  control  the  degree 
of  this  hardness.  This  is  the  one  characteristic  property  possessed 
by  the  high-carbon  steels  which  does  not  belong  to  wrought 
iron  and  the  lower  carbon  steels.  It  is  well  known  that  this 
hardening  can  be  brought  about  by  heating  the  steel  to  red- 
ness, and  cooling  it  quickly  by  plunging  in  water  or  oil.  The 
degree  of  hardness  depends  upon  the  temperature  of  the  steel  when 
cooling  takes  place.  It  is  usual  with  engineering  tools  to  first 
make  the  steel  very  hard  by  quenching  in  cold  water,  and  after- 
wards to  let  it  down  to  the  required  "  temper  "  by  gradually  rais- 
ing the  temperature  until  the  required  point  is  reached,  and  then 
again  quenching  in  water.  In  the  process  of  this  reheating,  the 
brightened  surface  of  the  metal  changes  colour,  each  tint  corre- 
sponding to  a  certain  degree  of  hardness. 

The  tensile  strength  of  the  hard  steels  may  vary  from  34  tons 
per  sq.  in.  up  to  considerably  over  100  tons  per  sq.  in.  Their 
ductility  is  not  great  in  those  steels  with  very  high  tensile 
strengths,  being  as  low  as  3  or  4  per  cent.  The  condition  of  hard 
steel  often  approaches  that  of  brittleness.  The  fractures  usually 
show  a  very  fine  crystalline  appearance. 


THE  MATERIALS  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION          155 

Besides  the  more  usual  kinds  of  steel  having  the  analyses 
which  have  been  indicated,  there  are  special  steel  alloys 
which  have  strength  properties  peculiar  to  themselves.  Among 
these  may  be  mentioned  nickel  steel,  in  which  a  quantity  of  nickel 
is  alloyed  with  the  other  constituents,  manganese  steel,  and  chrome 
steel. 

The  elastic  modulus  for  high-carbon  steel  is  not  very  much 
higher  than  for  the  low-carbon  and  medium  steels,  but  occasionally 
it  is  found  to  be  as  high  as  32,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

Stress  strain  diagrams  for  medium  and  hard  steels  are  shown 
on  Fig.  103. 

Steel  Castings. — The  tensile  strength  of  steel  which  is  run 
into  moulds  so  as  to  form  castings  is  not  high,  varying  from  17  to 
28  tons  per  sq.  in.  Its  ductility  is  low  and  it  often  contains  blow- 
holes, which  militate  against  its  strength  and  make  it  unsuitable 
for  castings  which  are  to  have  accurately  machined  surfaces. 
Steel  castings  are,  however,  much  stronger  than  similar  castings 
made  from  cast  iron,  and  considerable  advances  have  been  made 
of  late  years  by  which  sounder  castings  are  being  produced. 

Cast  Iron. — Cast  iron  differs  greatly  from  the  other  varieties 
of  iron  which  have  been  mentioned.  It  contains  a  larger  proportion 
of  carbon,  which  is  partly  combined  and  partly  in  a  state  of 
mechanical  mixture.  In  the  harder  kinds  the  carbon  is  almost 
all  combined,  while  in  the  softer  kinds,  such  as  are  used  for  parts 
which  have  to  be  machined,  it  exists  mostly  in  the  form  of  mixed 
graphite.  The  total  quantity  of  carbon  present  varies  from  rather 
less  than  2  per  cent,  to  something  over  4  per  cent.  In  addition 
to  the  carbon  there  is  also  silicon,  generally  from  1  to  3  per  cent. ; 
manganese  from  0'2  to  2;7  per  cent. ;  between  0'2  and  1/5  per 
cent,  of  phosphorus ;  and  from  a  trace  to  2 '5  per  cent,  of  sulphur. 

The  strength  of  cast  iron  is  much  greater  in  compression  than 
in  tension.  Its  tensile  strength  may  be  from  8  to  14  tons  per 
sq.  in.,  while  the  compressive  strength  varies  from  25  to  60  tons 
per  sq.  in. 

Tests  of  direct  shear  of  cast  iron  are  difficult  to  make  and  of 
little  use,  but  the  coefficient  of  torsional  strength,  that  is,  the 
stress  as  calculated  from  the  usual  torsional  formula  corresponding 
to  the  twisting  moment  which  it  takes  to  fracture  a  shaft,  works 
out  at  from  14  to  18  tons  per  sq.  in.  in  the  more  ordinary  kinds. 


156  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

There  is  practically  no  permanent  set  in  cast  iron  under  stress, 
beyond  what  can  be  measured  with  an  extensometer.  But  though 
the  permanent  set  is  small,  it  takes  place  at  very  low  loads,  and 
under  no  stress  can  cast  iron  be  called  truly  elastic.  An  approxi- 
mate elastic  modulus  can  be  calculated  at  low  stresses,  and  this  is 
found  to  vary  from  9,000,000  to  16,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.;  an 
average  value  is  about  15,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.,  or  about  half 
that  of  wrought  iron  and  steel. 

The  most  satisfactory  test  for  cast  iron  is  that  made  upon  a 
beam  of  the  metal  loaded  in  the  centre.  The  most  common 
dimensions  of  such  a  test  beam  are  1  in.  wide,  2  ins.  deep,  and 
loaded  in  the  centre  of  a  36-in.  span.  A  beam  of  this  kind  should 
withstand  about  3000  Ibs.  with  a  deflection  at  the  centre  of 


TFths  of  an  inch. 


As  cast  iron  is  never  perfectly  elastic,  the  beam  formula  does 
not  hold  good  up  to  the  breaking  load,  but  a  value  corresponding  to 
the  maximum  stress  from  the  beam  formula  may  be  calculated 
and  called  the  coefficient  of  bending  strength.  It  is  found  to 
be  about  one-and-a-half  times  the  tensile  strength. 

A  typical  load  strain  diagram  for  cast  iron  is  shown  on 
.Fig.  103. 

Malleable  Cast  Iron.— If  ordinary  castings  are  treated  by 
subjecting  them  at  a  high  temperature  to  the  oxidising  influence 
of  haematite  ore  or  manganese  dioxide,  the  carbon  in  the  iron  is 
reduced  and  the  metal  becomes  more  "steely."  The  resulting 
material  is  called  malleable  cast  iron.  It  does  not  possess  the 
characteristic  brittleness  of  cast  iron,  and  may  be  bent  and 
hammered  without  fracture.  Its  strength  is  increased  by  the 
process,  and  is  found  to  be  from  16  to  22  tons  per  sq.  in.  in 
tension. 

Copper. 

For  certain  purposes  the  use  of  copper  is  almost  indispensable. 
It  is  very  ductile,  an  excellent  conductor  of  heat,  and  has  a  high 
electrical  conductivity.  The  strength  of  copper  varies  according 
to  the  state  of  the  metal.  The  tensile  strength  varies  from  about 
7  tons  per  sq.  in.  in  the  poorer  sorts  of  castings  to  24  tons  per 
sq.  in.  in  the  hard  drawn  wire  used  for  overhead  conductors. 
Kolled  copper,  whether  in  plates  or  bars,  has  a  maximum  strength, 


THE  MATERIALS  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION 


157 


in  the  unannealed  state,  of  about  14  tons  per  sq.  in.  When  hard 
drawn  wire  or  hard  rolled  plate  or  bar  is  softened  by  heating  to 
redness  and  quenching  in  water,  the  tensile  strength  is  greatly 
diminished,  being  brought  down  to  two-thirds  its  former  value, 
while  its  ductility  is  greatly  increased.  In  the  hard  state  the 
elongation  is  from  1  to  6  per  cent.,  while  the  same  metal 
annealed  may  have  an  elongation  after  fracture  of  40  to  50 
per  cent. 

Hard  drawn  or  rolled  copper  should  have  a  proportional  limit 


JO 


201 


B 


g 

O       10 


10 


20 


30 


50 


PERCENTAGE  ELONGATION. 


FJG.   104. — Here  A  refers  to  copper  trolley  wire  annealed;  C,  the  same  in 
original  state;  B,  gun-metal ;  D,  aluminium  bronze. 

of  7  or  8  tons  per  sq.  in. ;  in  softened  copper  there  is  practically  no 
limit. 

The  elastic  modulus  for  copper  is  from  16,000,000  to  18,000,000 
Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

Alloys  of  Copper. — The  principal  alloys  of  copper  are  the 
various  bronzes  containing  copper  and  tin,  along  with  small  per- 
centages of  other  metals  such  as  zinc,  aluminium,  phosphorus,  and 
manganese.  The  strengths  of  these  alloys  vary  enormously 
according  to  the  proportions  of  the  different  ingredients,  and  may 


158  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

be  from  9  tons  per  sq.  in.  in  the  case  of  the  poorest  quality  of  cast 
yellow  brass  to  40  tons  per  sq.  in.  in  aluminium  or  manganese 
bronze.  A  good  quality  of  gun-metal  casting,  such  as  is  used 
for  engine  parts,  and  containing  copper,  say,  32  parts,  tin  4,  and 
zinc  1,  should  have  a  maximum  tensile  strength  of  14  tons  per 
sq.  in. 

Typical  stress  strain  diagrams  for  copper  and  some  of  its 
alloys  are  given  on  Fig.  104. 

Vitreous  Materials. 

Stone. — The  strength  of  stone  is  generally  specified  as  the 
number  of  tons  per  square  foot  of  area  which  are  required  to 
crush  it.  In  order  to  find  this  for  any  given  sample,  a  cubical 
piece,  from  3  ins.  to  12  ins.  length  of  side,  is  taken  and 
placed  between  the  platens  of  a  compression  testing  machine. 
The  load  should  be  uniformly  distributed  over  the  surface,  either 
by  inserting  thin  layers  of  millboard  between  the  platens  and 
the  specimen,  or,  better,  by  setting  it  in  a  bed  of  plaster  of 
Paris. 

The  actual  crushing  strength  varies  from  150  tons  per  sq.  ft. 
in  the  soft  Ancaster  stone,  300  for  the  softer  kinds  of  sandstone, 
500  for  Portland  limestone,  600  or  700  for  the  harder  sandstones, 
1000  for  Welsh  basalt,  and  1500  for  granite.  There  may  be 
considerable  variety  in  different  samples  from  the  same  quarry. 

Bricks. — Bricks  should  be  tested  for  strength  in  the  same 
manner  as  stone,  great  care  being  taken  to  level  any  inequalities 
exposed  to  pressure  by  previously  filling  up  with  cement  or  plaster 
of  Paris. 

Bricks  tested  in  this  manner  yield  results  of  which  the  fol- 
lowing are  a  few  typical  examples : — 

Kind  of  Brick.  Crushing  Stress, 

tons  per  sq.  ft. 

London  stock   .....     140 
Common  wire  cut,  Manchester  .  .260 

Leicester  wire  cut        .  .  .  .290 

Accrington  plastic        .  .  .  .250 

Blue  Staffordshire        .  .  .  .360 

Blue  Brindle,  Staffordshire       .  .  .480 


THE  MATERIALS  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION          159 

The  writer  has  found  that  the  strength  of  bricks  is  from  2J 
to  5  times  the  strength  of  the  brickwork  in  which  they  are  used. 
The  strength  of  the  bricks  themselves  is  only  a  very  rough 
indication  of  the  strength  of  the  resulting  brickwork.  In  order 
to  obtain  good  brickwork  from  good  bricks,  it  is  most  important 
that  the  cementing  material  be  of  the  very  best  quality. 
It  is  useless  to  employ  good  bricks  when  the  mortar  is 
bad.  The  results  of  all  the  experiments  which  have  been 
made  on  this  point  go  to  show  that  the  ultimate  strength  of 
a  given  sample  of  brickwork  depends  very  largely  upon  the 
mortar. 

Cement,  Mortar,  and  Concrete. — The  most  important  cement 
used  for  engineering  work  is  what  is  known  as  Portland  cement. 
This  is  an  artificial  product,  made  by  first  mixing  an  earth  which 
is  composed  principally  of  lime  with  one  in  which  clay  pre- 
dominates. These  two  are  ground  together,  wet  in  the  right 
proportions,  made  up  into  lumps,  dried,  and  then  burnt  like 
bricks.  A  hard  material  results  from  the  calcination,  and  this, 
when  ground  into  a  fine  powder,  is  the  required  cement.  It 
consists  of  compound  silicates  and  aluminates  of  lime.  When 
this  cement  is  mixed  into  a  paste  with  water  it  sets  hard,  so 
as  to  form  a  kind  of  artificial  stone.  The  time  of  setting  varies 
from  half  an  hour  to  several  hours.  In  order  to  determine  the 
quality  of  a  given  sample  of  cement,  a  number  of  tests  are 
applied;  but  it  is  only  necessary  to  refer  here  to  the  tests  for 
tensile  and  compressive  strength.  The  former  is  found  by 
applying  a  tensile  load  to  a  sample  made  up  into  a  suit- 
able form  for  holding,  and  called  a  briquette.  The  tensile 
strength  varies  from  200  to  800  Ibs.  on  the  sq.  in.  A 
good  cement  should  have  a  strength  of  400  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 
when  tested  at  the  end  of  a  week,  and  should  improve  with 
age. 

Crushing  tests  of  neat  cement  (that  is,  cement  alone)  and 
mixtures  of  sand  and  cement  yield  results  which  have  a  more 
direct  bearing  on  the  suitability  of  a  cement  for  engineering 
work,  where  most  of  the  stress  is  compressive.  They  are, 
however,  more  costly  to  make.  The  compressive  strength  of 
neat  cement  is  from  150  to  250  tons  per  sq.  ft.,  while  mixtures 
of  sand  and  cement,  such  as  are  used  for  mortar,  have  been 


160 


STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


shown  by  tests  made  by  the  writer  to  be   somewhat  as  follow, 
for  a  fairly  good  cement: — 


Ratio. 

Crushing  Strength,  tons  per  sq.  ft. 

Sand  :  Cement. 

7  Weeks  Old. 

20  Weeks  Old. 

1     :     1 

80 

100 

2    :     1 

30 

50 

3    :     1 

25 

30 

4    :     1 

20 

25 

5    :     1 

15 

20 

Portland  Cement  Concrete. — This  is  one  of  the  most  valuable 
materials  which  engineers,  whether  civil  or  mechanical, 'have  at 
their  disposal.  By  concrete  is  meant  a  compact  mass,  composed  of 
small  pieces  of  broken  stone,  gravel,  broken  brick,  or  other  similar 
substance  cemented  together  by  being  set  in  a  binding  matrix  of 
cement  and  sand.  This  broken  stone  and  sand,  which  is  mixed  with 
the  cement,  is  called  the  aggregate  or  ballast ;  the  proportion  of 
aggregate  to  cement  varies,  a  common  ratio  being  5  or  6  to  1. 
The  cement  and  ballast  are  mixed  dry,  then  sufficient  water  is 
added  to  produce  a  thin  paste  with  the  sand  and  cement,  and  the 
resulting  mixture  is  tipped  or  shovelled  into  the  position  it  has 
to  occupy,  and  allowed  to  set. 

The  ultimate  strength  of  the  concrete  so  formed  depends  on 
the  character  of  the  aggregate  employed,  on  the  quality  of  the 
cement,  on  the  manner  and  thoroughness  of  the  mixing,  on  the 
age,  and  on  the  ratio  of  cement  to  aggregate.  The  writer  has 
found  that  concrete  made  with  gravel  and  good  cement  in  the 
proportion  of  5  to  1  has  a  crushing  stress  at  the  end  of  thirteen 
weeks  of  210  tons  per  sq.  ft.,  and  after  thirty-four  weeks  of  225 
tons  per  sq.  ft.  Mr  Deacon  gives  the  results  of  tests  of  some 
samples  of  the  concrete  used  on  the  Vyrnwy  works  as  107  tons 
per  sq.  ft.  after  one  month,  and  185  tons  after  thirty-six  months. 
These  are  good  results,  but  in  some  cases  the  strength  may  be  as 
low  as  50  tons  per  sq.  ft. 

The  vitreous  materials,  including  stone,  brick,  brickwork, 
cement,  and  concrete  are  all  fairly  elastic,  and  take  little  per- 
manent set  up  to  considerably  above  the  working  stresses. 


THE  MATERIALS  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION 


161 


On  Fig.  105  is  shown  a  stress  strain  diagram  obtained  during 
the  loading  of  a  brickwork  pier.     This  is  typical  of  almost  all 


I50r 


100 


O-l  0-2  03 

COMPRESSION— Inches   per   foot   of  height. 
FIG.   105. 

vitreous  materials.     The  modulus  of  elasticity  varies  somewhat. 
The  following  are  a  few  results  obtained  by  the  writer  :— 


Material. 
Hard  bricks 
Softer  bricks 
Good  brickwork  . 
Poorer  brickwork 
Portland  cement  concrete 


Elastic  Modulus — Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 


5,000,000  to  6,000,000 
1,500,000  „  3,000,000 
1,200,000 
500,000 
1,500,000 


2,000,000 
1,000,000 
2,500,000 
L 


162  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 


Repeated  and  Reversed  Stresses. 

The  effect  of  the  repetition  or  reversal  of  the  applied  stresses 
has  a  most  important  bearing  on  the  life  of  machine  parts.  The 
evidence  which  is  available  on  this  point  is  by  no  means  com- 
plete, but  sufficient  has  been  obtained  to  help  the  designer  in  the 
proportioning  of  his  parts.  The  earliest  experiments  on  this 
subject  were  those  of  Wohler  and  Bauschinger,  and  these  have 
been  supplemented  more  recently  by  Eeynolds  and  Smith,  and  by 
Stanton  at  the  National  Physical  Laboratory. 

It  is  impossible  to  give  anything  like  a  complete  account  here 
of  the  results  obtained,  but  a  few  of  the  more  general  laws  arrived 
at  may  be  mentioned. 

Most  of  these  experiments  have  been  made  on  wrought  iron 
and  steel.  The  stresses  were  applied  in  different  ways,  and  ab 
different  speeds  of  repetition  and  reversal. 

Three  chief  methods  have  been  adopted,  namely:  either  the 
same  stress  ranging  from  zero  to  a  certain  fixed  value,  either  in 
tension  or  compression,  was  applied  many  times  in  succession 
until  rupture  took  place,  or  the  successive  application  was  from 
a  certain  stress  in  compression  to  either  one  of  the  same  or  a 
different  magnitude  in  tension ;  or,  again,  the  range  was  from  a 
maximum  compressive  stress  to  a  tensile  stress  of  the  same 
magnitude,  obtained  by  rotating  a  shaft  under  a  constant  bending 
moment.  The  speed  of  repetition  in  Wohler's  tests  was  approxi- 
mately 60  per  minute.  In  the  National  Physical  Laboratory 
experiments,  the  speed  was  intended  to  be  more  nearly  that  most 
commonly  met  with  in  modern  practice,  and  was  in  the  neigh- 
bourhood of  800  reversals  per  minute. 

The  main  fact  revealed  by  these  experiments  appears  to  be 
that  the  ultimate  failure  of  a  specimen  depends,  not  so  much  on 
the  magnitude  of  the  stress  imposed,  but  upon  the  range  of  stress. 
Speaking  roughly,  the  same  result  would  be  produced  by  applying 
a  stress  extending  from  10  tons  per  sq.  in.  in  compression  to  10 
tons  in  tension,  or  a  through  range  of  20  tons,  as  if  the  bar  were 
subjected  to  a  range  of  stress  which  reached  from  zero  to  20  tons 
per  sq.  in.  in  tension. 

Besides  the  range  of  stress  being  a  factor  in  the  ultimate  failure 


THE  MATERIALS  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION          163 

of  the  material,  this  was  found  to  depend  also  on  the  number  of 
repetitions  or  reversals. 

With  a  certain  range  of  stress  it  was  found  that  the  number 
of  repetitions  or  reversals  might  be  unlimited.  When  this  range 
was  exceeded,  the  number  of  repetitions  which  was  needed  to 
produce  failure  was  smaller  the  greater  the  stress. 

This  limiting  range  has  been  found  to  nearly  coincide  with 
what  has  been  called  the  natural  elastic  limit  of  the  material, 
and  which  has  already  been  defined.  It  has  therefore  been 
suggested  by  Unwin  that  it  might  be  possible  to  determine  the 
natural  limit,  and  to  take  this  as  the  safe  range  of  stress 
within  which  any  number  of  repetitions  or  reversals  would  not 
cause  failure. 

Unwin  quotes  the  following  results,  taken  from  Wohler's 
figures,  as  showing  how  the  limiting  number  of  reversals  is 
affected  by  the  range.  They  refer  to  samples  of  Krupp 
steel  which  were  subjected  to  reversals  of  equal  stress  in 
tension  and  compression  by  rotation  under  a  fixed  bending 
moment. 


Kange  of  Approximate  Number  of  Repeti- 

Stress.  tions  to  cause  Fracture. 

Tons  per  sq.  in.  Thousands. 

40-2  55 

344  128 

32-6  798 

30-6  1,666 

28-6  4,163 

28-6  45,050 


The  following  are  three  typical  sets  of  results  from  the  National 
Physical  Laboratory  experiments  of  Stanton.*  The  number  of 
reversals  per  minute  was  in  all  the  cases  quoted  very  nearly 
795  per  minute.  The  range  of  stress  was  from  a  compressive 
stress  to  a  tensile  stress,  the  ratio  of  tension  to  compression  being 
1-4  to  1. 

*  Min.  Proc.  Inst.C.E.,  vol.  iii. 


164  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

Wrought  Iron,  having  an  elastic  limit  of  14*28  tons  per  sq.  in. 
and  a  maximum  of  2  3  '76  tons  per  sq.  in. 

Range  of  Approximate  Number  of  Repeti- 

Stress.  tions  to  cause  Fracture. 

Tons  per  sq.  in.  Thousands. 

27-86  101 

26-86  200 

25-80  253 

24-60  217 

23-43  373 

21-25  1,000^| 

20-20  1,116  \  Not  broken. 

19-05  1,028J 

Mild  Steel.  —  0'33  per  cent,  carbon,  with   14'30  elastic  limit 
and  28'30  maximum  stress,  in  tons  per  sq.  in. 

Range  of  Approximate  Number  of  Repeti- 

Stress.  tions  to  cause  Fracture. 

Tons  per  sq.  in.  Thousands. 

3017  68 

28-06  97 

26-4  236 

25-78  1,914 

25-71  1,330 

23-29  2,000.     Not  broken. 

Piston-rod  Steel.  —  0'446  per  cent,  carbon,  with  19'62  elastic 
limit  and  43  '8  5  maximum  stress,  in  tons  per  sq.  in. 

Range  of  Approximate  Number  of  Repeti- 

Stress.  tions  to  cause  Fracture. 

Tons  per  sq.  in.  Thousands. 

30-16  155 

29-93  120 

28-85  308 

28-80  752 

27-88  1,032     ' 


27-88  3,049  broken' 

The  few  figures  here  quoted  appear  to  show  that  for  every 
material  there  is  a  certain  range  of  stress  within  which  the  loading 
may  be  indefinitely  repeated  without  any  perceptible  weakening  ; 
but  if  it  is  extended  beyond  this  range,  fracture  will  eventually 
occur  after  a  certain  number  of  repetitions. 


THE  MATERIALS  USED  IN  CONSTRUCTION 


165 


Safe  Stresses  Allowable  in  Practice. 

In  designing  structures  and  machine  parts,  it  is  customary  to 
find  the  stress  which  may  be  applied  to  any  material  by  dividing 
the  maximum  stress  as  found  from  an  ordinary  tensile  test  by 
a  factor  of  safety.  A  much  more  reasonable  and  scientific  plan 
is  to  say  that  the  material  may  be  subjected  to  a  certain 
range  of  stress  as  fixed  by  the  results  of  some  such  experiments 
as  those  mentioned,  or  one  which  has  a  direct  relation  to  the 
natural  elastic  limit. 

In  the  light  of  our  existing  knowledge  of  the  strength 
properties  of  the  materials  of  construction  and  the  effect  of 
repetition  and  reversal  of  stress,  the  following  may  be  taken  as 
allowable  working  stresses. 


Material. 

Simple 
Compression. 

Simple 
Tension. 

Shear  Stress 
in  Torsion. 

Tons  per  sq.  in. 

Tons  per  sq.  in. 

Tons  per  sq.  in. 

Average  Wrought  Iron    . 

5f 

5f 

3f 

Do.  across  grain  . 

5| 

5| 

Mild  Steel       . 

6 

6 

3f 

Medium  Steel 

7£ 

n 

5| 

High-Carbon  Steel 

9| 

9| 

9* 

Steel  Castings 

5 

5 

4 

Cast  Iron 

5 

1* 

1J 

These  are  for  steady  loads  in  one  direction  only.  Where 
the  load  is  repeated  so  as  to  alternate  many  times  between  no 
stress  and  stress  of  one  kind,  the  above  must  be  multiplied  by  f ; 
and  where  the  stress  alternates  many  times  between  tension  and 
compression  of  the  same  amount,  they  must  be  multiplied  by  \. 

The  Micro-structure  of  Metals. 

In  recent  years  much  has  been  do.ne  to  add  to  our  knowledge 
of  the  internal  structure  of  metals,  and  of  the  effects  of  stress 
upon  this  structure.  A  few  of  the  main  facts  may  be  mentioned. 

When  a  polished  surface  of  iron  or  steel  is  placed  under  a 
microscope  of  sufficient  power,  it  is  seen  that  the  surface  appears 
to  be  divided  up  into  irregular  areas  like  a  map.  These  areas 


166  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

are  the  sections  of  the  crystals  which  combine  to  form  the 
material.  It  is  further  seen  that  these  crystal  surfaces  have  not 
all  the  same  appearance,  some  being  bright  and  others  dull. 
The  size  of  the  grains  depends  upon  the  thermal  treatment, 
rapid  cooling  leading  to  small  crystals  and  slow  cooling  to 
large  ones. 

When  the  surface  is  examined  after  the  application  of  a  stress 
somewhat  beyond  the  elastic  limit,  it  is  found  that  the  grains  are 
elongated  in  the  direction  of  stress  when  the  load  is  tensile. 
After  the  lapse  of  a  considerable  time  at  the  ordinary  tempera- 
ture, or  the  application  of  a  moderate  temperature  for  a  short 
time,  the  crystals  resume  their  former  shapes.  This  corresponds 
to  what  takes  place  when  the  elastic  limit  has  been  raised  by 
stress,  when  it  is  found  that  the  limit  is  again  lowered  to  its 
original  value  after  some  time  has  elapsed  or  heat  has  been 
applied. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  fracture  of  materials  in  tension 
or  compression  generally  resolves  itself  into  failure  by  shear,  and 
that  this  is  most  noticeable  in  the  compression  of  brittle  materials 
like  cement  and  cast  iron  and  the  tensile  fracture  of  some  kinds 
of  steel. 

Professor  Ewing  has  observed  and  pointed  out  that  a  some- 
what similar  effect  is  produced  in  the  constituent  grains  of  iron 
and  steel  when  strained  some  little  way  past  the  proportional 
limit.  Under  a  microscope  of  high  power  it  is  seen  that  each 
grain  of  material  so  strained  is  covered  with  rows  of  parallel 
lines,  there  being  generally  three  or  four  systems  of  these 
inclined  to  one  another.  These  lines  are  really  minute  steps 
representing  the  section  of  "  slip  planes "  with  the  surface  of  the 
material.  It  thus  appears  that  the  permanent  set  takes  place 
by  an  internal  sliding,  not  of  one  grain  upon  another,  but  along 
parallel  surfaces  in  the  individual  grains.  It  is  by  means  of 
this  slip  that  the  change  of  shape  of  the  crystals  can  take  place. 


APPENDIX 

GENERAL  TABLE  OF  STRENGTHS  AND  WEIGHTS 


Material. 

Ultimate  Tensile 
Strength. 

Crushing 
Strength. 

IRON  AND  STEEL. 

Tons  per  sq.  in. 

Tons  per  sq.  in. 

Wrought  iron  — 

Merchant  bar        .... 

19    to    22 

11    to     14 

Ship  plates    ..... 

21     „     23 

Best  Yorkshire      .... 

23     „     25 

12    to    16 

Rivet  iron      ..... 

24     „     26 

13     „     17 

Low-carbon  steel,  0'10%  C.         . 

23 

13 

Bridge  steel,  0-20%  C.  . 

26    to    28 

14    to    17 

Boiler  steel,  0  '25%  to  0  -30%  C.       . 

28     ,,     32 

14     „     18 

Tyre  steel,  0-28%  C.       . 

36     „     48 

Medium  steels,  0'30%  to  0'45%  C.— 

Forging  steel         .... 

33     „     35 

15    to    18 

Hard  forging  steel 

35     „     40 

16     „     20 

Piston-rod  steel,  0'45%  C.      . 

44 

Nickel  steel  

24    to    55 

12*  to    38 

24     „     30 

11     „     15 

High-carbon  steel,  0  '45%  to  1  '50%  C.  — 

Manganese  steel   .... 

33     „     42 

... 

Spring  steel,  0  -50%  C.    . 

60     „     70 

Tungsten  steel       .... 

70 

... 

Hadfield's  forged  cast  steel  . 

46    to  125 

... 

Manganese  steel  wire    . 

100 

Pianoforte  wire      .... 

100    to  150 

... 

Ordinary  steel  castings     . 
Hadfield's  unhammered  castings 
Cast  iron,  very  soft  for  machining    . 

17     „    28 
32     „     64 
8     „     10 

25    to    35 

hard          .... 

14 

60 

Malleable  iron  castings     . 

16    to    22 

21 

COPPER. 

14 

Ordinary  cast    .... 

6    to    10 

Plate,  hard  rolled      .... 

14     „     15 

... 

Hard  drawn  trolley  wire  . 

24 

... 

Hard  drawn  wire,  small  diameter    . 

28    to    30 

... 

BRONZE,  ETC. 

Ordinary  gunmetal  castings     . 
Good  gunmetal  castings   . 
Rolled  bronze,  hard  .... 

10 
14 

27 

... 

Aluminium  bronze    .         . 

27    to    40 

... 

Yellow  brass,  good  .... 
Aluminium,  rolled  bar 

12 
9    to    12 

Zinc  

1     „       3 

Tin    

2     »» 

... 

Lead          .         

107 


168 


APPENDIX 


TABLE  OF  STRENGTHS  AND  WEIGHTS  -continued. 


Material. 

Ultimate  Tensile 
Strength. 

Crushing 
Strength. 

VITREOUS  MATERIALS. 

Tons  per  sq.  in. 

Tons  per  sq.  ft. 

Stone— 

Softer  kinds  of  sandstone 

150    to    300 

Portland  limestone 

... 

500 

Hard  sandstones  .... 

600   to    700 

Welsh  basalt          .... 

... 

1000 

Granite          ..... 

1500 

Brick— 

London  stock        .... 

140 

Common  wire  cut  .... 

260 

Leicester  wire  cut 

... 

290 

Accrington  plastic 
Blue  Staffordshire 

... 

250 
360  to   480 

Brickwork  — 

Common  bricks  and  mortar  . 

50 

„                      better  mortar 

... 

80 

Good  class  bricks  and  best  mortar 

... 

100  to   200 

Portland  cement,  good  average 

300    to     500 

150 

Mortar,  3  sand,  1  cement 

... 

30 

„        2      „       1                        . 

... 

50 

1      „       1                        • 

.  100 

Portland  cement  concrete,  5  to  1 

... 

100  to  220 

Breaking  Strength  of  a 

TIMBER. 

1'xV'xl"  beam. 

Central  load,  Ibs. 

White  pine        ..... 

450 

360 

Memel  pine       ..... 

500 

500 

Ash  

700 

580 

Beech        

600 

550 

Oak  

550 

530 

Teak          

800 

750 

Greenheart        ..... 

850 

780 

Pitch  pine         .         . 

550 

570 

ELASTIC  OR  YOUNG'S  MODULUS. 


Material. 

Elasticity. 

Million  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

Wrought  iron  and  steel      .... 

27    to     32 

Cast  iron      ...... 

9            16 

Copper         ...... 

16            18 

Gunmetal     ...... 

13           16 

Aluminium  ...... 

10            12 

Hard  bricks             ..... 

5              6 

Softer  bricks            . 

1              3 

Good  brickwork     ..... 

1              2 

Portland  cement  concrete  .             . 

1-5              2'5 

Timber,  average  along  the  grain  . 

1-5 

APPENDIX 
WEIGHTS  OF  MATERIALS. 


169 


Material. 

Lbs.  in  1  cub.  ft. 

Wrought  iron  . 

485 

Steel     . 

499 

Cast  iron 

450 

Copper 

552 

Gunmetal 

528 

Brass    . 

525 

Tin 

455 

Zinc      . 

437 

Lead,  sheet     . 

711 

Aluminium 

166 

,,           cast 

160 

Sandstone 

150 

Portland  stone 

151 

Welsh  basalt   . 

172 

Granite 

165 

Bricks,  soft     . 

110 

,,       hard    . 

134 

Portland  cement  concrete 

138 

Lime  mortar    . 

105 

Earth,  average 

100 

White  pine 

30 

Memel  pine 

35 

Pitch  pine 

40 

Beech  . 

43 

Ash      . 

45 

Spruce 

32 

Teak    . 

55 

Greenheart 

71 

Oak      . 

53 

Lignum  vitae    . 

83 

L2 


ADDITIONAL  EXAMINATION  QUESTIONS 


CHAPTER  I. — ELASTICITY. 

1 .  Explain  the  meaning  of  the  following  terms : — Stress,  strain,  elastic 

limit,  yield  point,  and  modulus  of  elasticity. 

2.  Sketch  typical  load  strain  diagrams  (a)  for  a  tensile  test  of  wrought  iron 

up  to  the  yield  point,  and  (6)  for  a  compression  test  of  cast  iron. 
Point  out  the  differences  in  behaviour  of  these  materials. 

3.  Explain  the  meaning  of  the  expression  "  Elastic  Modulus."    How  would 

you  set  about  finding  its  value  for  a  given  sample  of  cast  iron  ?    Sketch 
the  form  of  load  strain  diagram  you  would  expect  to  obtain. 

4.  In  a  tensile  test  of  a  steel  bar  1  in.  in  diameter,  it  was  found  that  the  elastic 

extension  for  each  ton  of  load  was  0'000985  in.  on  a  length  of  10  ins. 
Find  the  modulus  of  elasticity.  [29,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

5.  A  copper  trolley  wire  50  ft.  long  sustains  a  pull  of  250  Ibs.,  and  under 

this  load  is  found  to  be  stretched  0*07  in.    Find  the  elastic  modulus, 
the  diameter  of  the  wire  being  0'40  in.          [17,050,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 


CHAPTER  III.— BEAMS. 

6.  If  M  is  the  bending  moment  at  a  point  in  a  beam,  I  the  moment  of 

inertia  of  the  section  at  this  point,  /  the  maximum  stress  in  the 
material  at  the  section,  and  y  the  distance  from  the  neutral  axis  of 
the  section  to  the  part  where  the  maximum  stress  occurs,  prove 
that  M.  _  J_ 

I   '"    y 

7.  A  girder  resting  on  supports  70  ft.  apart  carries  two  rolling  loads  of  10 

tons  and  15  tons  respectively.  The  loads  roll  across  at  a  constant 
distance  apart  of  8  ft.  Find  the  maximum  bending  moment  on  the 
girder. 

8.  What  will  be  the  stress  caused  in  the  flanges  of  a  plate  girder,  80  ft.  span, 


172  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

depth  of  7 1  ft.,  and  flanges  16  ins.  wide,  and  If  ins.  thick,  when 
carrying  a  uniform  load  of  1  '60  tons  per  sq.  ft.  of  length  ? 

[6'08  tons  per  sq.  in. 

9.  The  slide  bars  of  a  horizontal  engine  are  40  ins.  long,  and  have  a 

rectangular  section  l£  ins.  wide.  Find  the  depth  of  the  bars  if  the 
greatest  vertical  force  in  the  centre  of  a  bar  is  500  Ibs.  and  the 
maximum  stress  allowable  in  the  material  is  2  tons  per  sq.  in. 

[2'31  ins. 

10.  A  cast  iron  beam  1'92  ins.  deep,  1'03  ins.  wide,  when  tested  on  a  span 

of  36  ins.,  is  found  to  break  with  a  central  load  of  2760  Ibs.  Find 
what  would  be  the  central  breaking  load  of  a  similar  beam  3^  ins. 
deep,  1§  ins.  wide,  resting  on  supports  45  ins.  apart.  [9870  Ibs. 

11.  A  plate  girder  has  a  span  of  70  ft.  and  a  depth  of  8  ft.    The  flanges  are 

16  ins.  wide  and  1^  ins.  thick.  Find  what  load  per  foot  run  the 
girder  must  carry  in  order  that  the  stress  in  the  metal  of  the  flanges 
may  not  exceed  6  tons  per  sq.  in.  [1  '88  tons  per  ft. 

12.  What  is  the  greatest  bending  moment  which  each  point  of  a  beam 

supported  at  the  ends  is  liable  to  under  a  uniform  load  of  1  ton  per 
ft.  and  a  moving  load  of  10  tons,  the  span  being  15  ft.1?  Find  an 
expression  for  this,  and  also  sketch  the  bending  moment  diagram. 

13.  If  a  beam  of  pitch-pine  timber  1  in.  wide,  1  in.  deep,  and  1  ft.  span 

breaks  with  a  central  load  of  800  Ibs.,  find  the  safe  distributed  load 
that  may  be  put  upon  a  beam  of  the  same  material  15  ft.  span,  4  ins. 
wide,  and  8  ins.  deep,  using  a  factor  of  safety  of  6.  [4551  Ibs. 

14.  Estimate  the  safe  distributed  load  that  can  be  carried  by  a  pitch-pine 

beam  5  ins.  wide,  9  ins.  deep,  and  resting  upon  supports  18  ft.  apart. 

[6000  Ibs. 

15.  Find  the  weight  of  a  steel  girder  20  ft.  long,  6  ins.  deep,  and  having 

flanges  5  ins.  wide.  The  thickness  of  the  metal  is  f  in.  in  the  flanges 
and  f  in.  in  the  web.  [767  Ibs. 

16.  A  railway  bridge  130  ft.  span  is  covered  for  half  its  length  by  a  train 

weighing  2  tons  per  ft.  of  length,  one  end  being  at  the  centre  of  the 
span.  Find  the  bending  moment  and  the  shearing  force  at  a  point 
in  the  middle  of  the  covered  portion  of  the  bridge.  Also,  sketch  the 
diagrams  of  bending  moment  and  shearing  force. 

[2113  tons-feet],  [32'5  tons. 

17.  Find  the  depth  at  the  centre  of  a  cross-girder  18  ft.  span,  flanges  7  ins. 

wide  and  f  in.  thick,  when  the  distributed  load  is  2|  tons  per  foot 
run.  The  stress  in  the  metal  is  not  to  exceed  6  tons  per  sq.  in. 

[2  ft.  9  ins. 

18.  In  a  beam  40  ft.  span,  resting  freely  at  its  ends,  two  loads  of  5  tons  are 

placed,  each   10  ft.  from  the  centre.    Find  the  bending  moment 


ADDITIONAL  EXAMINATION  QUESTIONS  173 

and  shearing  force  at  each  support,  at  the  centre,  and  under  each 

load.    Also,  draw  the  bending  moment  and  shearing  force  diagrams. 

[At  supports,  M  0,  S  5  ;  at  centre,  M  50,  SO;  at  loads,  M  50,  S  5. 


CHAPTER  IV.— GRAPHICAL  MOMENTS  OF  INERTIA. 

19.  Solve  Example  2,  Chapter  IV.,  by  calculation. 

20.  Prove  the  rule  for  finding  graphically  the  modulus  of  the  section  of 

a  rectangular  beam,  and  point  out  how  it  is  connected  with  the 
ordinary  beam  formula  as  obtained  by  purely  mathematical  reasoning. 

21.  The  upper  flange  of  a  cast  iron  girder  is  5  ins.  wide  and  1  in.  thick,  the 

lower  flange  is  8  ins.  wide  and  2  ins.  thick,  the  total  depth  is  10  ins., 
and  the  web  1  in.  thick.  Find  graphically  the  moment  of  inertia  of 
the  section.  [341  inch-units. 


CHAPTER  V. — DEFLECTION  OF  BEAMS. 

22.  Prove  that  at  any  point  in  a  loaded  beam  the  relation  between  the 

radius  of  curvature,  the  bending  moment,  the  elastic  modulus  of  the 

material,  and  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  section  is  -^^^ 

23.  Find  the  central  deflection  of  a  tram  rail  on  a  clear  span  of  10  ft.  when 

the  elastic  modulus  is  29,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  The  maximum 
stress  in  the  material  is  6  tons  per  sq.  in.  The  centre  of  gravity  of 
the  section  is  3'57  ins.  from  the  bottom  edge. 

[Central  load  =  4'l  tons  ;  central  deflection  =  0' 198  in. 

24.  A  plate  girder  has  a  span  of  80  ft.  and  a  depth  of  7  ft.  6  ins.    Its  flanges 

are  16  ins.  wide  and  1*75  ins.  thick.  The  stress  in  the  metal  of  the 
flanges  must  not  exceed  6  tons  per  sq.  in.  Find  the  uniformly  dis- 
tributed load  per  foot  that  may  be  put  upon  the  girder,  and  the  deflec- 
tion in  the  centre  under  this  load.  The  elastic  modulus  may  be 
taken  as  28,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  [w  =  1  '57  ;  A  =  1  '025  ins. 

25.  Find  the  load  per  foot  run  that  is  carried  by  a  steel  girder  30  ft.  span  and 

18  ins.  deep,  the  flanges  being  8  ins.  wide  and  1  £  ins.  thick,  when  the 
maximum  stress  in  the  material  is  7  tons  per  sq.  in.  Also,  find  the 
deflection  at  the  centre  under  this  load.  E  =  29,000,000. 

[w  =  0*809  ton  ;  A  =0'81  in. 

26.  A  road  bridge  over  a  river  is  carried  across  three  spans,  of  which  the 

central  one  is  150  ft.  and  the  two  shore  spans  90  ft.  each.  The 
girders  are  in  three  portions,  made  up  of  two  shore  parts,  each  110  ft. 
long,  and  a  central  part,  also  of  110  ft.  in  length.  These  shore  por- 


174  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

tions  form  cantilevers  which  project  beyond  the  river  piers,  and  from 
the  ends  of  these  the  centre  girder  is  freely  hung.  With  a  uniform 
load  of  2  tons  per  ft.  throughout  the  length  of  the  bridge,  sketch 
the  diagrams  of  shearing  force  and  bending  moment. 

27.  A  steel  joist  whose  moment  of  inertia  is  55*9  is  tested  with  a  central 

load  on  a  span  of  5  ft.,  and  it  is  found  that  for  every  8  tons  incre- 
ment of  load  there  is  a  central  deflection  of  0'0506  in.  Find  the 
modulus  of  elasticity. 

28.  Prove  the  rule  for  finding  the  load  carried  by  each  pier  of  a  continuous 

girder  supported  on  three  points  equidistant  and  on  the  same  level. 
Sketch  the  bending  moment  diagram  for  this  case. 


CHAPTER  VI.— SHEAR  STRESS  IN  BEAMS. 

29.  Knowing  the  shearing  force  at  any  section  of  a  loaded  beam  and  the 

dimensions  of  its  section,  deduce  an  expression  which  will  give  the 
intensity  of  the  shear  stress  at  any  point  in  the  section. 

30.  In  Question  24  the  web  of  the  girder  is  %  in.  thick.    Find  the  mean  and 

maximum  shearing  stresses  in  the  web  close  to  one  abutment. 

31 .  Sketch  the  curves  showing  the  variation  of  shearing  stress  in  the  cases 

of — (1)  A  beam  of  rectangular  section;  (2)  A  beam  of  I  section; 
(3)  A  tram  rail. 


CHAPTER  VII. — ECCENTRIC  LOADING. 

32.  A  solid  steel  bar  3  ins.  in  diameter  carries  a  tensile  load  of  40  tons. 

What  will  be  the  stress  in  the  metal  when  the  load  is  applied  along 
the  axis  of  the  bar;  and  also,  what  will  be  the  minimum  and 
maximum  stresses  when  the  direction  of  the  load  is  shifted  ^  in. 
from  the  axis  1 

[Tensile  =  13'2  tons  per  sq.  in. ;  compressive  =  l*8  tons  per  sq.  in. 

33.  A  load  of  20  tons  is  applied  axially  to  a  pier  of  brickwork  1^  ft.  square 

in  section,  at  a  point  6  ins.  from  the  centre  of  the  section  measured 
in  a  direction  parallel  to  one  side.  Find  the  maximum  and  minimum 
stresses  in  the  material  in  tons  per  sq.  ft. 

[Maximum  stress,  26'6 ;  minimum  stress,  8'8. 

34.  A  rectangular  bar  of  steel  4  ins.  wide  and  2  ins.  thick  is  bent  so  as  to 

form  a  semicircular  plate,  the  narrow  edges  being  curved  and  the 
wide  sides  remaining  flat.  The  radius  of  curvature  of  the  centre 
line  is  5  ins.  Find  the  tensile  loads  that  must  be  applied  diametri- 


ADDITIONAL  EXAMINATION  QUESTIONS  175 

cally  at  the  two  ends  which  will  cause  a  maximum  stress  in  the 
material  of  5  tons  per  sq.  in. ;  also,  find  the  minimum  stress.  Prove 
the  formula. 

[W  =  5'33  tons ;  minimum  stress  =  -4'33  tons  per  sq.  in. 


CHAPTER  VIII. — STRUTS. 

35.  Estimate  what  will  be  the  probable  collapsing  load  of  mild  steel  strut 
which  is  freely  hinged  at  the  ends,  1 5  ft.  long  between  the  hinges, 
and  has  a  solid  circular  section  3  ins.  in  diameter. 


CHAPTER  IX. — TORSION. 

36.  If  a  length  of  shafting  3  ins.  in  diameter  and  running  at  100  revolutions 

per  minute  will  transmit  50  horse-power,  what  horse-power  can  be 
transmitted  by  a  5 -inch  shaft  of  the  same  material  when  running  at 
180  revolutions  per  minute  1  [416*6  H.P. 

37.  If  a  wrought  iron  shaft  3f  ins.  in  diameter  will  safely  transmit  90  horse- 

power at  130  revolutions  per  minute,  find  the  size  of  steel  shaft  to 
transmit  160  horse-power  at  72  revolutions,  the  ratio  of  the  torsional 
strength  of  steel  to  that  of  wrought  iron  being  as  7  to  5.  [4*8  ins. 

38.  A  solid  steel  shaft  is  to  transmit  600  horse-power  at  a  speed  of  58 

revolutions  per  minute,  and  the  stress  in  the  material  is  not  to  exceed 
8000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  Find  the  diameter.  [7'46  ins. 

39.  What  horse-power  can  be  transmitted  by  a  hollow  shaft,  whose  diameters 

are  10  ins.  and  5  ins.,  when  running  at  150  revolutions  per  minute, 
the  stress  in  the  material  being  limited  to  8000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

[3500  H.P. 

40.  A  wrought  iron  shaft,  4  ins.  in  diameter,  and  30  ft.  long,  is  used  to 

transmit  power.  Find  the  maximum  twisting  moment  allowable  in 
order  that  the  shear  stress  in  the  metal  may  not  exceed  4  tons  per 
sq.  in.,  and  find  through  how  many  degrees  the  shaft  will  be  twisted 
under  this  moment.  G  =  1 2,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. 

[T  =  l  12,600  inch-lbs.;  H.P.  =  50'2;  0  =  77°. 

41.  A  helical  spring,  made  from  round  steel  0'96  in.  in  diameter,  has  an  out- 

side diameter  of  4'8  ins.  and  consists  of  10  complete  coils.  When 
unloaded,  the  coils  nearly  touch  one  another.  Find  the  amount  this 
spring  will  be  extended  under  a  load  of  1}  tons,  when  the  shear 
modulus  of  the  material  is  1 1,000,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  [  A  =  1*36  ins. 

42.  A  hollow  shaft,  whose  outer  is  twice  its  inner  diameter,  is  to  be  used 

to  transmit  8000  horse-power  while  making    76    revolutions    per 


176  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

minute,  and  the  stress  in  the  material  must  not  exceed  7500  Ibs.  per 
sq.  in.  Find  the  outer  diameter  ;  also,  find  the  angle  of  twist  on  a 
length  of  50  ft.  [D2  =  16'9  ins. ;  0  =  2T. 


CHAPTEE  X.— TORSION  AND  BENDING. 

43.  In  the  middle  of  a  free  span  of  shafting,  10  ft.  long  between  the  bear- 

ings, there  is  a  pull  of  1200  Ibs.,  at  right  angles  to  its  centre  line,  due 
to  a  belt.  The  shaft  is  transmitting  30  horse-power  at  a  speed  of 
200  revolutions  per  minute.  The  shear  stress  in  the  material  must 
not  exceed  8000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  Find  the  equivalent  twisting  moment 
and  the  diameter.  [T^  -  73,200  ;  M  =  36,000  ;  d=3'6  ins. ;  T  =  9450. 

44.  Prove  the  formula  you  make  use  of  in  the  last  question. 

45.  Find  the  shear  stress  in  the  metal  of  a  shaft  3  ins.  diameter  which  is 

transmitting  25  horse-power  at  a  speed  of  250  revolutions  per  minute. 
If  there  were  to  be  a  bending  moment  of  10,000  inch-lbs.  acting  on 
the  shaft  in  addition  to  the  twisting  moment,  what  would  the 
diameter  then  have  to  be  ?  [1 188  Ibs.  per  sq.  in. ;  4'53  ins. 

46.  The  distance  from  the  centre  of  the  crank  pin  to  the  centre  of  the  near 

bearing,  in  the  case  of  an  overhung  engine  crank  9  ins.  radius,  is  10 
ins.  Find  the  diameter  of  the  journal  when  the  maximum  pressure 
on  the  crank  pin  is  12,000  Ibs.,  and  the  stress  in  the  material  does 
not  exceed  7500  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  [d=5*4  ins. 


CHAPTER  XI. — CYLINDERS. 

47.  Find  the  thickness  of  a  copper  pipe  to  carry  steam  at  a  pressure  of  250 

Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  The  diameter  is  7  ins.,  and  the  stress  on  the  metal  is 
not  to  exceed  2000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  [£=0'43  in. 

48.  Find  the  diameter  of  a  boiler  steam  drum  in  mild  steel,  whose  diameter 

is  to  be  3  ft.,  and  the  working  pressure  160  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  The 
stress  in  the  material  must  not  exceed  10,000  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  [3%  of 
an  inch. 


CHAPTER  XII. — RIVETED  JOINTS. 

49.  Two  steel  plates,  1  in.  thick  and  7  ins.  wide,  are  allowed  to  overlap  at 
their  ends  and  are  connected  by  three  1^-in.  steel  rivets.  The 
overlap  is  sufficiently  great  to  prevent  any  possibility  of  the  rivets 
tearing  through  the  edges.  If  the  rivets  are  made  from  the  same 
steel  as  the  plates,  would  you  expect  the  joint  to  fail  by  the  tearing 


ADDITIONAL  EXAMINATION  QUESTIONS  177 

of  the  plates  between  the  rivet  holes  or  by  the  shearing  of  the  rivets  1 
At  what  load  do  you  suppose  this  would  take  place  ? 

[By  tearing  at  91  tons. 

50.  Design  a  longitudinal  double-riveted  lap-joint  for  a  boiler  steam  drum 
in  steel,  3  ft.  diameter,  1 60  Ibs.  working  pressure. 


CHAPTEES  XIII.,  XIV.,  AND  XV. 

51.  Make  a  sketch  of  a  typical  load  strain  diagram  as  obtained  during  the 

tension  test  of  a  bar  of  cast  iron.  Define  and  quote  values  for 
(a)  the  maximum  stress  in  tension  and  compression,  and  (6)  the 
elastic  modulus  for  cast  iron. 

52.  State  briefly  the  chief  strength  properties  of  wrought  iron,  steel,  and 

cast  iron,  and  say  for  what  purposes  each  is  best  suited. 

53.  What  is  a  load  strain  diagram  ?     Sketch  a  typical  diagram  for  a  tensile 

test  of  wrought  iron,  and  explain  how  the  diagram  shows  the  elastic 
limit  and  yield  point.  In  what  respects  does  cast  iron  differ  from 
wrought  iron  as  regards  its  elastic  properties  1 

54.  Describe  the  effect  of  repeatedly  applying  a  tensile  load  which  is  slightly 

above  the  P-limit  to  a  bar  of  steel ;  and  how  does  this  result  differ 
from  that  obtained  when  the  load,  instead  of  being  always  tensile,  is 
alternately  tensile  and  compressive  1  State  what  you  know  as  to 
how  the  results  of  Wohler's  experiments,  and  others  of  a  similar 
nature,  affect  questions  of  design. 

55.  Sketch  typical  load  strain  diagrams  (a)  for  a  tensile  test  of  wrought 

iron  up  to  the  yield  point,  and  (6)  for  a  compression  test  of  cast  iron. 
Point  out  the  differences  in  behaviour  of  these  materials. 

56.  What  is  the  usual  bending  test  for  cast  iron  1    State  how  it  is  made, 

and  what  kind  of  results  you  would  expect  to  obtain  from  average 
material. 

57.  Describe  the  test  you  would  employ  for  the  purpose  of  ascertaining  the 

principal  tensile  strength  properties  of  a  strip  of  mild  steel  plate. 
Make  a  diagrammatic  sketch  of  a  testing  machine  suitable  for  this 
purpose  with  which  you  are  acquainted.  Give  the  results  you  would 
expect  from  a  good  sample  of  structural  steel,  and  sketch  the  load 
strain  diagram. 

58.  A  round  bar  of  mild  steel  is  tested  in  tension,  with  the  following 

results : — 

Original  dimensions  :  1*002  ins.  diameter,  10  ins.  long. 
Final  dimensions  :  0'659  in.  diameter,  13'06  ins.  long. 
Load  at  yield  point,  13' 15  tons ;  load,  maximum,  21 '90  tons. 


178  STRENGTH  OF  MATERIALS 

From  these  data,  find  stress  at  yield  point,  maximum  stress,  per- 
centage extension  on  ]0  ins.,  and  percentage  reduction  in  area. 

[1670  tons  per  sq.  ip. ;  27*80  tons  per  sq.  in. ; 
30'6  per  cent. ;  and  57  per  cent. 

59.  Sketch  the  typical  load  strain  diagram  for  a  mild  steel  tension  test 

specimen,  indicating  the  chief  points  on  the  curve. 

60.  State  clearly  how  you  would  set  about  finding  out  whether  a  given 

sample  of  Portland  cement  was  good  or  bad.  How  would  you 
expect  the  properties  of  two  samples  of  the  same  cement  to  differ, 
one  of  which  was  coarsely  ground  and  the  other  ground  extremely 
fine? 

61.  In  two  samples  of  steel  one  is  found  to  contain  0*2  per  cent,  of  carbon 

and  the  other  0'5  per  cent.  Apart  from  the  effects  of  any  other 
constituents,  what  differences  would  you  expect  to  find  in  the 
strength  properties  of  these  two  ? 

62.  State  what  you  know  as  to  the  percentage  of  carbon  in  steel,  and  its 

bearing  on  the  strength  properties  of  different  steels. 

63.  A  cast  iron  beam,  1/90  ins.  deep,  0'98  in.  wide,  when  tested  on  a  span 

of  36  ins.,  is  found  to  break  under  a  central  load  of  2500  Ibs.  If  the 
corresponding  dimensions  had  been  2  ins.  and  1  in.,  what  would  you 
expect  to  have  been  the  breaking  load  1  State  whether  you  consider 
this  to  be  a  good  result,  and  how  deflection  would  have  been  shown 
before  fracture.  Do  you  consider  this  to  be  a  good  test  as  compared 
with  a  tensile  test,  and,  if  so,  why  ?  [2830. 


INDEX 


ALLOYS  of  copper,  157 
Angle  of  twist,  102 

BEAMS,  deflection  of,  47 
Beams,  shearing  in,  69 
Beams,  stresses  in,  25 
Bending  and  torsion,  110 
Bricks,  strength  of,  158 
Brickwork,  strength  of,  159 

CAST  iron,  155 
Cement,  Portland,  159 
Columns,  92 
Concrete,  160 
Continuous  beams,  73 
Contraction  and  dilatation,  14 
Copper,  156 
Cubic  elasticity,  22 
Cylinders,  thin,  115 
Cylinders,  thick,  116 

DEFLECTION  of  beams,  47 
Deflection  due  to  shear,  72 
Deformation,  measurement  of,  136 
Distribution  of  stress,  4 

ECCENTRIC  loading,  78,  146 
Efficiency  of  riveted  joints,  129 
Elasticity,  direct,  6 
Elasticity  of  volume,  22 
Extensometer,  Martens,  136 

GRAPHICAL  determination  of  I,  39 
Gunmetal,  157 

HARD  steel,  154 
Helical  springs,  104 
High-carbon  steel,  154 

179 


Hooke's  Law,  6 

Horse-power  transmitted  by  shafts, 
103 

INERTIA,  moment  of,  32 
Intensity  of  stress,  1 
Iron,  cast,  155 
Iron,  malleable  cast,  156 
Iron,  wrought,  150 

LATERAL  contraction,  14 
Limit  of  proportionality,  138 
Limits  of  elasticity,  138 
Load,  1 

Loading,  unsymmetrical,  78,  146 
Low-carbon  steel,  152 

MALLEABLE  cast  iron,  156 

Martens  mirror  extensometer, 
136 

Medium  steel,  153 

Microstructure  of  metals,  165 

Mild  steel,  152 

Modulus  of  elasticity,  6 

Modulus  of  rigidity,  21 

Moment  of  inertia,  32 

Moment  of  inertia  found  graphi- 
cally, 39 

Moment  of  resistance,  27 

Mortar,  strength  of,  159 

OBLIQUE  stresses,  15 

PILLARS,  92 
Plasticity,  5 
Portland  cement,  159 
Piston-rod  steel,  164 
Poisson's  Ratio,  14 


180 

Previous  loading,  effect  of,  147 
Proportionality,  limit  of,  138 

REPEATED  stresses,  162 
Reversed  stresses,  162 
Riveted  joints,  125 

SAFE  stresses,  165 
Shafts,  99 

Shear  stress  in  beams,  69 
Springs,  104 
Steel,  mild,  152 
Steel,  medium,  153 
Steel,  high-carbon,  154 
Stone,  158 
Struts,  92 


INDEX 


TESTING,  131 
Thick  cylinders,  116 
Torsion,  99 

Torsion,   combined  with  bending, 
110 

UNSYMMETRICAL  loading,  78,  146 

YIELD  point,  140 
Young's  Modulus,  6 

VITREOUS  materials,  1 58 
WROUGHT  iron,  1 50 


OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY 


v 


OF 


OLIVER    AND   BO  YD,    PRINTERS,   EDINBURGH 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


YC